JP2019217367A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest by using an operation means.SOLUTION: A performance control means executes a predetermined performance based on the fact that a first operation means or a second operation means is operated in an operation promoting performance for pressing operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in a variable performance. In the operation promoting performance, operation of a first operation type, or operation of a second operation type differing from the first operation type is pressed as operation to the first operation means, operation of a third operation type, or operation of a fourth operation type differing from the operation of the third operation type is pressed as operation to the second operation means, a ratio of pressing the operation to the first operation type is allowed to differ from a ratio of pressing the operation to the second operation type, and a ratio of pressing the operation to the third operation type is allowed to differ from a ratio of pressing the operation to the fourth operation type.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 68

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines that play games using game balls, operating means such as effect buttons and operation levers that can be operated by the player are provided, and the operating means is operated during the operation effective period for validating the operation on the operating means. Many perform a predetermined effect on the basis of the effect.

  For example, in Patent Literature 1, during a valid operation period of a push button, an operation validity notification that a button operation is valid is performed, and based on a push operation of the push button during the valid operation period, an effect for an effect is generated. A gaming machine that executes a role action effect that moves a role (movable member) is described. Patent Document 1 discloses that a stick controller may be used instead of a push button as an operation means.

  Further, in Patent Document 2, an operation promoting effect for prompting a player to perform an operation during an operation effective period of an effect button is performed, and the operation state of the effect button is set to an operation state different from a normal state (a protruding state, a retracted state, and a rotation state). State or vibration state), and a specific effect corresponding to a specific operation by a specific effect image, effect sound, or light emission of a lamp is executed based on the operation of the effect button.

JP 2014-46107 A JP 2013-233453 A

  However, when a predetermined effect is performed based on the operation of the operation unit, the operation type of the operation that is validated is determined according to the predetermined effect to be performed.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player using an operation means.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine of the invention according to claim 1 of the present application is a determining means (main CPU) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on establishment of a starting condition. And a special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game, as determined by the judgment means to execute the special game, and a first operation means (effect button (effect button) which can be operated by the player. Or a first effect button or the like)), and a second operation means (an operation lever (or a second effect button or the like)) different from the first operation means, and the judgment result based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Effect control means (sub CPU) for performing a variable effect using an effect symbol for notifying the effect, the effect control means, the first operation means or the second operation in the variable effect hand Performing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means in the operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means; An operation of one operation type or an operation of a second operation type different from the first operation type is prompted, and an operation of the third operation type or an operation of the third operation type is performed on the second operation means. The ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the first operation type and the ratio of prompting the operation of the second operation type are different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the third operation type. And the rate at which the operation of the fourth operation type is encouraged is made different.

  In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, wherein the operation promoting effect includes: An operation promoting effect of prompting only the operation of the first operation type and prompting only the operation of the fourth operation type as an operation on the second operation means is characterized in that the operation is an operation promotion effect.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a player using an operation means.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is a partial perspective view of a game machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A) is a figure showing the big hit determination table for the 1st special symbol, and (b) is a figure showing the big hit determination table for the 2nd special symbol. (A) is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for a jackpot winning, (b) is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for a small hit winning, and (c) is a diagram illustrating a special symbol determination table for a loss. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a diagram showing a first big hit game big win opening / closing control table, (c) is a second big hit game big win port opening / closing control table (D) is a diagram illustrating a third jackpot game large winning opening opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram illustrating a small hitting game control table, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a small hitting game large winning opening opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data decision table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition decision table. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the 1st to 30th variation in the high probability game state and the time saving game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol variation pattern determination table at the 31st to 74th variation in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. It is a figure showing the special symbol variation pattern determination table at the 75th to 84th variation in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. (A) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for a normal symbol, (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a normal symbol variation pattern determination table, and (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. FIG. 7E is a diagram showing an auxiliary game control table, and FIG. 7F is a diagram showing a second start-up opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration of a special symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage section of the special symbol holding storage area, (c) is a diagram of a normal symbol holding storage area of the main RAM 101c. FIG. 3D is a diagram illustrating a configuration, and FIG. 4D is a diagram illustrating a configuration of each storage unit of a normal symbol holding storage area. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing in a main control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process in a main control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows a winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the small hitting game processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit game end processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in an effect control board. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing in the production control board. It is a flowchart which shows up to the middle of the command analysis processing in the effect control board. 34 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the command analysis processing in FIG. 33. It is a flowchart which shows the variable effect pattern determination processing in the effect control board. It is a flow chart which shows the production mode setting processing in the production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing in the effect control board. It is a figure showing an example of a menu screen. It is a figure showing an effect mode decision table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation effect pattern determination table matched with the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation effect pattern determination table matched with the effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation effect pattern determination table matched with the effect mode C. It is a figure showing the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for every variable effect pattern of the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every special effect type which can be performed in the variable effect of the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for every variable effect pattern of the effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every special effect type which can be performed in the variable effect of the effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every special effect type which can be performed in the variable effect of the effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for every variable effect pattern of the effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every type of each special effect which can be performed in the variable effect of the effect mode D. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. FIG. 9 is a diagram in which a part of a special effect type determination table of a variable effect pattern for a loss in the effect mode A and a part of a special effect type determination table of a variable effect pattern for a big hit and a small hit in the effect mode A are extracted and configured. is there. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. FIG. 9 is a diagram in which a part of a special effect type determination table of a variable effect pattern for a loss in the effect mode B and a part of a special effect type determination table of a variable effect pattern for a big hit and a small hit in the effect mode B are extracted and configured. is there. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. FIG. 9 is a diagram in which a part of a special effect type determination table of a variable effect pattern for a loss in the effect mode C and a part of a special effect type determination table of a variable effect pattern for a large hit and a small hit in the effect mode C are extracted and configured. is there. It is a figure for explaining a temporal flow of a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect image. FIG. 9 is a diagram in which a part of a special effect type determination table of a variable effect pattern for a loss in the effect mode D and a part of a special effect type determination table of a variable effect pattern for a large hit and a small hit in the effect mode D are extracted and configured. is there. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting content for every special effect type which can be performed in the variable effect of the effect mode A. It is a figure showing an operation type decision table of effect mode A. It is a figure showing the special effect information table of effect mode B. It is a figure showing an operation type decision table of effect mode B. It is a figure showing the special effect information table of effect mode C. It is a figure showing an operation type decision table of effect mode C. It is a figure showing the special effect information table of effect mode D. It is a figure showing an operation type decision table of effect mode D.

(1st Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention (also referred to as “the present embodiment”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y has a game board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame Y1, and a game area 2A in which game balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to an island facility of a game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism H at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the front area of the game area 2A and the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 visibly covers the game area 2A with the game board 2 closed.

  At the other end of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 for storing a plurality of game balls, and a firing operation device 3 which can be operated to fire the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launching device (not shown) capable of launching a game ball toward the game area 2A. In addition, the game ball launching device is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the saucer 50 are supplied to the game ball launching device.

  The firing operation device 3 has a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a firing handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball firing device fires a game ball with an intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball firing intensity”).

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a game ball are disposed immediately below a special winning opening 8 described later. A guide member 29D having a guide path that can be guided to the second starting port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into a substantially central portion of the game board 2. The image display device 14 composed of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. In addition, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is arranged outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is arranged outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired at a predetermined game ball firing intensity rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. A plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 2A. The game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 11 are provided in the game area 2A. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detection sensor 11a. When the general winning opening detection sensor 11a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. .

  A first winning gate 9 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. A second winning gate 10 through which game balls can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The prize gates 9, 10 are provided with prize gate detection sensors 9a, 10a for detecting game balls. Normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a detect game balls. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  At the lower part of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, there is provided a first starting port 6 which is invariable and can always enter a ball. The first starting port 6 is provided with a first starting port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. The first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first starting port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first starting port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Immediately below the first starting port 6, a variable second starting port 7 is provided. The second starting port 7 is controlled by the second starting port control device 70 into one of a basic mode (closed mode) or a special mode (open mode) in which a prize cannot be won. The second starting port 7 is also provided with a second starting port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The second starting port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a driving unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The ordinary movable piece 70A is formed of a rectangular door member, and usually stops (except for a predetermined condition being satisfied) in a state where the surface thereof is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting port 7 is closed. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70A constitutes a basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ordinary movable piece 70A pivots forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled to a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the normally movable piece 70A opens the second starting port 7, it is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive a flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second starting port control device 70 is to be determined as a winning normal symbol in the above-described ordinary symbol lottery.

  On the downstream side of the second winning gate 10, a variable big winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which a winning is possible. The special winning opening 8 is provided with a special winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the special winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The special winning opening control device 80 includes a special movable piece 80A that is rotatable and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a driving unit that rotates the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is formed of a rectangular door member, and normally stops (except for a predetermined condition being satisfied) in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A and closes the special winning opening 8. are doing. The closing of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A forms a basic aspect of the special winning opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the special winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special movable piece 80A opens the special winning opening 8, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A, and it is possible to receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). ) Is determined to be a special jackpot symbol or a special jackpot symbol.

  On the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21 and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol holding device A hold display device including a display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays a result of a first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 6. The second special symbol display device 21 includes: This is a variable display device that displays a result of a second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  The first special symbol lottery means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 6, a random number value for jackpot determination is acquired, and the acquired random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value corresponding to "big hit". It means to determine whether or not. The second special symbol lottery means that when the game ball enters the second starting port 7, a random number value for jackpot determination is acquired and the acquired random number value for jackpot determination is a random value corresponding to “big hit”. It means to determine whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 performs a variable display of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and displays the first special symbol lottery result. A stop display is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 is an announcement of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol display device 21.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the special symbol stop display, a specific LED representing the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays a result of a normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10. Ordinary symbol lottery means that when a game ball passes through the prize gates 9 and 10, a random number for hit determination is obtained and it is determined whether or not the obtained random number for hit determination is a random value corresponding to "hit". Processing.

  When the ordinary symbol lottery is performed, the ordinary symbol display device 22 performs a variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the lottery result, and stops the ordinary symbol representing the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. That is, the stop display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 22 is the notification of the lottery result.

  For example, the symbol display device 22 usually includes a plurality of LEDs. In the variable display of the normal symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the ordinary symbol, a specific LED representing the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is turned on.

  By the way, even if a game ball enters the start-up openings 6 and 7 during a special game in which a special symbol is being displayed or a special game in which the special winning opening control device 80 is operated, the special symbol is immediately displayed and the special symbol is displayed. The result of the symbol lottery is not always notified. That is, the change display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a certain condition, an upper limit value is set for the number of special symbols that can be changed and displayed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the starting ports 6 and 7. In other words, up to four rights to execute the special symbol change display can be reserved for each of the starting ports 6 and 7.

  The first special symbol holding display device 23 displays the number of holdings (U1: hereinafter, referred to as "first special figure holding number") of the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "first special figure changing display"). I do. The second special symbol holding display device 24 displays the number of holdings (U2: hereinafter, “second special figure holding number”) of the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special figure changing display”). I do. Each of the first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turns on a predetermined LED according to the number of each hold.

  Similarly, the variable display of ordinary symbols (hereinafter, referred to as “variable display of ordinary symbols”) also has the upper limit number of retained items set to four, and the number of retained symbols (G: hereinafter, referred to as “number of ordinary reserved symbols”) ) Is usually displayed on the symbol holding display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turns on a predetermined LED according to the number of ordinary symbols held.

  The gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect devices are the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the first effect agent device 1701, the second effect agent device 1702, and the third effect device. It is composed of the accessory device 1703. An image display device 14, a first production accessory device 1701, a second production accessory device 1702, and a third production accessory device 1703 are provided on the game board 2, and the audio output device 15 and the production lighting device are provided. 16 are provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs an effect using images by displaying various still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14. However, a display device of another type such as a plasma display or an organic EL display may be used.

  The first production accessory device 1701 includes a first decorative member 17A as a movable member. In addition, the second production accessory device 1702 includes a second decorative member 17B as a movable member. Further, the third effect accessory device 1703 includes a third decorative member 17C as a movable member. Each production accessory device operates a decoration member as a movable member provided for each, and performs the production by the operation. The sound output device 15 performs sound effects by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs effects by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of light from each lamp.

  As will be described later, the first decorative member 17A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like provided in the first effect accessory device 1701 by drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the first decorative member 17A moves from the “standby position 1” (the original position) above the image display device 14 to the “operation position 1-1” (the central position on the front surface of the image display device 14). Position after movement). Also, the first decorative member 17A moves from the “standby position 1” to the “operating position 1-2”, which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, via the “operating position 1-1”. I do. The first decorative member 17A performs a moving operation such as returning from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” after moving from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1”, or the “first operation member 1” from the “standby position 1”. After moving to “operation position 1-2” via “−1”, the moving operation returns to “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1”.

  Similarly, the second decorative member 17B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second effect accessory device 1702 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Thus, the second decorative member 17B falls to the left from the “standby position 2” (the original position), which is the right position of the image display device 14, with the lower portion of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, and the image display device It moves to the “operation position 2” (the position after the movement), which is the position on the front surface of No. 14. When the second decorative member 17B moves from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, the second decorative member 17B then stands to the right with the fulcrum below the second decorative member 17B and moves to the “standby position 2” (original position). The user performs a moving operation such as returning.

Similarly, the third decorative member 17C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the third effect accessory device 1703 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Accordingly, the third decorative member 17C falls rightward from the “standby position 3” (original position), which is the lower left position of the image display device 14, with the lower part of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum, and displays the image. It moves to “operation position 3” (the position after the movement), which is the position on the front surface of the device 14. When the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operating position 3”, the third decorative member 17C then stands up to the left with the fulcrum below the third decorative member 33c and moves to the “standby position 3” (original position). An operation such as returning is possible.
In addition, any of the first decorative member 33a, the second decorative member 33b, and the third decorative member 33c is not limited to the shapes and operation modes described here.

  In addition, the saucer 50 is provided with a first effect button device 18 and a second effect button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects and pachilog games (including privilege games) to be described later. I have.

  The first effect button device 18 includes a first effect button 18A as an operable “first operation unit”, a first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 for detecting a pressing operation on the first effect button 18A, and a first effect button. A protruding state detection switch 18a21 for detecting that the 18A is held at a maximum special operation position described later is provided (see FIG. 3).

The first effect button 18A is in a non-protruding state where the first effect button 18A is in a normal operation position (FIG. 2A), and a protruding state where the first effect button 18A protrudes to an operation position higher than the non-projection state (FIG. 2 ( b)) and a state in which the pressing operation is detected can be changed between a state in which the pressing operation is detected and a state in which the pressing operation is retracted below the non-projecting state (FIG. 2C).
In the non-projecting state, the first effect button 18 </ b> A is in a state in which only the distal end portion slightly projects upward from the surface around the saucer 50.
In the protruding state, the first effect button 18A is in a state of protruding several times (about 7 to 10 times) higher than the non-protruding state from the surface around the saucer 50.
Further, the first effect button 18 </ b> A retreats slightly downward from the surface around the saucer 50, and enters a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. That is, the first effect button device 18 has a structure capable of changing the first effect button 18A between a non-projecting state, a projecting state, and a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the first effect button 18A in the non-protruding state or the protruding state is pressed to be in the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and thereafter, when the pressing operation is released, the state returns from the pressed state to the non-protruding state.

  Note that the direction in which the first effect button 18A moves between the position in the non-projecting state, the position in the protruding state, and the position where the pressing operation is detected (pressing position) is defined as the direction in which the first effect button 18A moves. I do.

  When the first effect button 18A is in a state where the pressing operation is detected, the first effect button operation detecting switch 18a11 detects the first effect button operation detection indicating that the complete pressing operation of the first effect button 18A is detected. The signal is output to the lamp control board 104.

  Further, when the first effect button 18A is in the protruding state, the protruding state detection switch 18a21 outputs a protruding state detection signal indicating that the first effect button 18A is held at the position where the first effect button 18A protrudes to the maximum (the position of the protruding state). Output to the lamp control board 104.

  The first effect button 18A has a housing made of a transparent member capable of transmitting light and incorporates an LED (not shown). When the LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the first effect button 18A to the outside, and the first effect button 18A is illuminated.

  The second effect button device 19 is provided to the left of the first effect button device 18 and is connected to a second effect button 19A as an operable “second operation means” and a second effect button 19A. And a second effect button operation detection switch 19a for detecting a pressing operation on the second effect button 19A (see FIG. 3).

  The second effect button 19A has an upper part 191A, a left part 192A, a lower part 193A, a right part 194A, and a central part 195A. The entire upper surface of the second effect button 19A including the upper part 191A, the left part 192A, the lower part 193A, the right part 194A, and the central part 195A is provided so as to be able to be pressed down while slightly projecting from the tray 50. .

  The second effect button 19A has a housing made of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the second effect button 19A to the outside, and the second effect button 19A is illuminated.

The light emission mode of the second effect button 19A changes between an operation valid period in which the operation on the second effect button 19A is valid and a period other than the operation valid period.
For example, the lighting state of the second effect button 19A changes between an operation valid period and other periods. For example, the second effect button 19 </ b> A is in a “lighting state” in which it is lit in any color during the operation valid period, and is in a “non-lighting state” in which it is not lit in other periods. Further, for example, the second effect button 19A is in a state of being lit in a specific color (for example, red) in the operation valid period, and is in a color (for example, blue) different from the operation valid period in other periods. Lighting state ".

  When the second effect button 19A is pressed, the second effect button operation detection switch 19a outputs a second effect button operation detection signal indicating to the lamp control board 104 that the second effect button 19A is pressed. Is output. When the second control button operation detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the signal to the control board 102.

  The second effect button operation detection switch 19a includes an upper operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the upper portion 191A, a left operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the left portion 192A, and a lower operation detection that detects a pressing operation of the lower portion 193A. The switch includes a detection switch, a right operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the right portion 194A, and a central operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the central portion 195A (not shown).

  When the detection switches of the upper portion 191A, the left portion 192A, the lower portion 193A, the right portion 194A, and the center portion 195A of the second effect button operation detection switch 19a detect the pressing operation, respectively, the upper operation detection signal, the left operation detection signal, The lower operation detection signal, the right operation detection signal, and the center operation detection signal are output to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. The upper operation detection signal, the left operation detection signal, the lower operation detection signal, and the right operation detection signal are collectively referred to as a “second effect button operation detection signal”.

  In the present embodiment, the state in which the operation on the first effect button 18A as the “first operation means” or the operation on the second effect button 19A as the “second operation means” is referred to as “operation effective state”. That. The sub CPU 102a performs control such that a predetermined effect is executed by operating an operation unit whose operation is valid in the “operation valid state”.

Examples of the “operation valid state” include an “operation valid state” when a predetermined condition is satisfied, in addition to an “operation valid period” including a predetermined period set in advance.
As an example of the predetermined condition, as described later, the sub CPU 102a performs a single operation of pressing the first effect button 18A during a standby state in which the game effect is not being executed, and the designated operation execution flag is set. Is set to on. The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid state in which the operation on the second effect button 19A is valid based on the setting of the designated operation execution flag being turned on.

  The effect device executes various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special figure lottery effect performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special figure lottery effect is performed on the image display device 14. In the special figure lottery effect, a change display of the special effect symbol and a stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

  The change display of the special effect symbol is performed in response to the change display of the special symbol, and the special effect symbol fluctuates in a predetermined manner for a predetermined time. The stop display of the special effect symbol is performed in response to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, when the variable display and the stop display of the special effect symbol are collectively referred to as “special effect symbol display”). In the special effect symbol stop display, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode representing the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special decorative symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, “1” to “9”) arranged in a left area, a center area, and a right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. Decorative pattern representing a number). In the variation display of special effect symbols, the special decoration symbols in each row move from top to bottom (variable display) as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the mode of the fluctuation display of the special effect symbol is not limited to this. In addition, during the special effect symbol change display, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, and a movie are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of the special effect symbols, the three rows of the special decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. An array of special decoration symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a horizontal line at the center in the display area 140) when the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed indicates the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special figure lottery effect, a roulette effect performed at the opportunity of the ordinary symbol lottery described later, a special game effect performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a special symbol fluctuation display or a special game are performed for a predetermined period of time. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in an internal waiting state (a so-called customer waiting state) that cannot be performed are performed.

  On the back surfaces of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided. The control means includes a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108, and the like.

(Internal configuration of control means)
Next, the control means 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, and monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y. When the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, A power interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power interruption detection signal goes high, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal goes low, the main CPU 101a enters an operation stop state. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, a timer (a crystal oscillator), and the like, performs arithmetic processing relating to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, via an input port (not shown), a first starting opening detecting sensor 6a, a second starting opening detecting sensor 7a, a big winning opening detecting sensor 8a, a first winning gate detecting. The sensor 9a, the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and the general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. When each detection sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a second starting opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normally movable piece 70A of the second starting opening control device 70 via an output port (not shown), and a special winning opening control. A special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second starting opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold, via an output port (not shown). The display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each of the display devices 20 to 25.

  Further, a game information output terminal plate 108 is connected to an output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information related to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal plate 108. The game information output terminal plate 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing relating to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  The first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, the protrusion state detection switch 18a21, and the second effect button operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the first effect button 18A is pressed (pressed) and reaches the operation detection position, the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 indicates on the lamp control board 104 that the first effect button 18A has been pressed. 1 Outputs an effect button operation detection signal. The lamp control board 104 outputs the first effect button operation detection signal input from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 to the effect control board 102.

  The protrusion state detection switch 18a21 outputs a protrusion state detection signal to the lamp control board 104 when the first effect button 18A is in the protrusion state. The lamp control board 104 outputs the protruding state detection signal input from the protruding state detection switch 18a21 to the effect control board 102.

  When the second effect button 19A is pressed, the second effect button operation detection switch 19a outputs a second effect button operation detection signal indicating to the lamp control board 104 that the second effect button 19A is pressed. Is output. When the second control button operation detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the signal to the control board 102.

  The sub CPU 102a includes a command output from the main control board 101, a first effect button operation detection signal output from the first effect button device 18, a second effect button operation detection signal, a protruding state detection signal, and a second effect button. Based on a selection button detection signal output from the device 19, an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator), and the like, a program stored in the sub-ROM 102b is read and arithmetic processing is performed. A command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the control board 104 and the image control board 105. The sub RAM 102c functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

  The payout control board 103 performs firing control for firing game balls and payout control for paying out game balls to a player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 in a bidirectional manner.

  The input side of the payout CPU 103a is connected to a touch sensor 32a and a knob 32b of a firing volume. The touch sensor 32a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player or a clerk touches the firing handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the firing handle 32, and transmits a firing handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The launch volume knob 32 b is connected to the launch handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 to detect a rotation angle.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. When receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the payout control board 103 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates, and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the knob 32b of the firing volume is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. As described above, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the firing solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the knob 32b of the firing volume, and fires the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing device 4. One game ball is fired each time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation. Therefore, the number of game balls fired per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  The output side of the payout control board 103 is connected to a payout drive unit 51 of a payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to a player from a storage tank (not shown). The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b and performs arithmetic processing based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, and controls the payout device 5 to send a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a work area for data during calculation processing of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, like the above-described boards. To the output side of the lamp control board 104, a lighting device 16 for effect and a character device 17 for effect are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a controls light emission of the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter, referred to as “effect control command”), and irradiates light of the effect lighting device 16. Drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid and a motor for operating the special effect device 17 based on the effect control command. Further, the lamp CPU 104a controls the drive of the electric motor 18b for moving the first effect button 18A of the first effect button device 18 between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the effect control command, and the first effect button device. Light emission control for causing the 18 LEDs 1821d to emit light is performed.

  A first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, a protruding state detection switch 18a21, and a second effect button operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

  The lamp control board 104 receives the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, the protruding state detection signal from the protruding state detection switch 18a21, or the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11. When the effect button operation detection signal is input, the input detection signal is output to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 detects the first effect button operation detection signal, the protruding state detection signal, and the second effect button operation detection between the effect control board 102 and the first effect button device 18 and the second effect button device 19. Relay the signal.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal relating to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14, and the audio output to the audio output device 15. And a control unit 105A that controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C by controlling the image generation unit 105C and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The control unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes a control CPU 105Aa, a control ROM 105Ab, and a control RAM 105Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The control CPU 105Aa is connected to a control ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, so that a control program required for the operation of the control CPU 105Aa is read. When receiving the command related to the effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the overall CPU 105Aa gives an instruction of an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 to the image generating unit 105B based on the command, and also sends an instruction to the sound generating unit 105C. An instruction for a sound to be output from the sound output device 15 is issued.

  The general RAM 105Ac functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the general CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is configured by a mask ROM, and includes a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generating program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is stored.

  The animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting the specific contents of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes a weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method And various information such as a duty ratio, which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14, and the like.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and a VRAM 105Bc that includes a frame buffer that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. Have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to a CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is a source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the image data based on an instruction from the central CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scenery, a character, and a speech, which constitutes a decorative design image or a background of the decorative design. Data. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 105Bb compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like formed by a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of an image.

  The CGROM 105Bb stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying a color. Note that the CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which not all image data is compressed, but only part of the image data. As the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba generates a synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal, vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14 by dividing the frequency of the pulse signal, and outputs it to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 4A and 4B are diagrams illustrating an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A is a table (a jackpot determination table for a first special symbol) referred to in a jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (a jackpot determination table for a second special symbol) referred to in a jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  In any of the jackpot determination tables, a jackpot determination table referred to when a jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value) (hereinafter, referred to as a “low probability jackpot determination table”). And a jackpot determination table referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value) (hereinafter, referred to as a “high-probability jackpot determination table”).

  Each jackpot determination table stores a jackpot determination value and a determination result in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, by matching the random number for jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the jackpot determination table, the “big hit”, “small hit” Either "hit" or "losing" is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", a special jackpot game with opening of the special winning opening 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. If the result of the big hit determination is "small hit", a small hit game with opening of the special winning opening 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, neither the jackpot game nor the small jackpot game is executed.

  Note that, in the floating effect as the special figure lottery effect, as described later, a reach effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. As the reach effect, for example, during the variation display of the effect symbol, the above-described special figure decoration symbol is pseudo-stopped in two of the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14. (A part of the effect symbol performs a pseudo stop display), and when a predetermined special symbol decorative symbol stops on a predetermined activated line in the remaining one area, an array of special symbol decorative symbols indicating a jackpot win is obtained. There is a reach effect in which a state (a so-called “reach state”) occurs. If the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", the result of the jackpot determination is still "losing" even in the staging specific state of the reach state.

  After the reach state occurs in the reach effect, there is a case where a specific effect (so-called “super reach effect”) that enhances the expectation of the jackpot win is developed or not. Further, in the reach effect, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect that increases a player's expectation of winning a big hit without performing a reach state is performed. If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the reach effect is basically performed in almost all cases.

  FIGS. 5A to 5C are diagrams illustrating an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and determines the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (the special symbol stop display mode) based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is.

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the big hit determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 5A is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the big hit determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B is a table when the result of the big hit determination is “small hit”. The table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 5C, is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of the starting port (the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7) in which the game ball entered as the trigger for the special symbol determination is entered.

  In each special symbol determination table, a special symbol determination value and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the game is stopped and displayed by comparing the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the special symbol determination table. Special symbols are determined. Special figure stop design data and a special effect design specification command are set as identification information of the special design to be stopped and displayed.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the special effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102. The special effect designating command is generated at the start of the special symbol change display (at the time of the special symbol storage determination process in step S310) and transmitted to the effect control board 102.

  The special effect designating command is a 1-byte MODE for identifying a special design display device (the first special design display device 20 or the second special design display device 21) on which the special design related to the special design determination is stopped and displayed. It consists of data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  For the special effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it indicates that the special symbol display is to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second special design is displayed. The special symbol display device 21 indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special effect symbol designating command whose MODE data is "E3H" is referred to as "first special effect designating command", and the special effect designating command having MODE data of "E4H" is referred to as "second special effect designating command." "

  FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit game control table used when controlling the big hit game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, an opening time, which is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the first opening of the special winning opening 8, and an opening transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. The designated command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8, the ending time, which is the period from the last opening of the special winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the time of start is set. Conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, at the time of the big hit game, which control condition is used is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

  6 (b) to 6 (d) are diagrams showing an example of a special winning opening opening / closing control table for a jackpot game used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8. FIG. FIG. 6 (b) is a table referred to in the first big hit game constituting the big hit game, and FIG. 6 (c) is a table referred to in the second big hit game constituting the big hit game. ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

  The special winning opening opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling opening and closing of the big winning opening 8 during the big hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8 include a round number (R), which is a round game number, and a special telephone, which is the opening number of the special winning opening 8 (operation of the special winning opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of the small hit game control table used when controlling the small hit game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the small hitting game, an opening time, which is a period from when the small hitting game is started to when the first winning opening 8 is opened, and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8, the ending time which is the period from the last opening of the special winning opening 8 to the end of the small hitting game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are associated with the type of the small hit, that is, the type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, in the case of the small hit game, which control condition is used is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating an example of a special winning opening opening / closing control table for a small hit game used to control the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8. The big win opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling opening / closing of the big win 8 during the small hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 8 include a round number (R), a special power operation number (K) which is an opening number of the special winning opening 8 (operation of the special winning opening control device 80), and a special winning The opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the mouth 8 are set.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating an example of a game condition data determination table referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information indicating a game condition newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to a jackpot winning probability (low-probability game state / high-probability game state), and in each of the divided tables, the special symbol type (special figure stop symbol data) and the game The condition data is uniquely associated and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data indicates a jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning. If “01H”, the jackpot winning probability is set to a high probability (high-probability game state) after the jackpot game, and if “00H”, the jackpot winning probability is low (low-probability game) after the jackpot game. State). On the other hand, the lower byte of the game condition data indicates the start opening winning easiness newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the starting opening winning easiness is set to be easy (time saving game state) after the jackpot game, and if it is “00H”, the starting opening winning easiness is difficult after the jackpot game (non-time saving gaming state). ).

  FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a new game condition to be set when the big hit game ends (at the time of the big hit game end processing). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the starting opening prize easiness are set as the game conditions.

  The game condition determination table includes the game condition data, each game condition, that is, ON / OFF of a flag (high-probability flag and time-saving flag) indicating the game condition, and the number of times a special symbol can be changed according to the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter, referred to as “executable number”) are uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means the specified number of times the special symbol is fluctuated according to the newly set game condition. Note that the number of times this special symbol display can be executed corresponds to the number of times of the jackpot determination.

In this way, in the gaming machine Y, when the big hit game is executed, the main CPU 101a is more advantageous to the player after the big hit game is finished than in the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time saving game state). A specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) is set.
In this specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state), the main CPU 101a ends the specific game state when the number of times of the jackpot determination (the number of executable special symbol displays) reaches 84 times. I have. As described above, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called “ST machine”.

(Special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table)
9 to 12 are diagrams illustrating examples of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol variation display mode (hereinafter, referred to as a “special figure variation pattern”).

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure change pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure change pattern in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart for determining a special figure change pattern when the number of times the special symbol changes in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is 1 to 30 times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a case where the special figure change pattern is determined when the number of times the special symbol changes in the high probability game state and the time saving game state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is 31 to 74 times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a process for determining a special figure change pattern when the number of times the special symbol changes in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is 75 to 84 times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
In addition, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when a special fluctuation pattern is determined in the high probability gaming state and the non-time saving game state when the third jackpot is won, or is referred to when a small jackpot is won. Description of the special figure variation pattern determination table is omitted.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, the main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8B) of the main ROM 101c and checks the current game state determined by ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the time reduction flag. If the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated is checked. Select a pattern determination table.

  When determining that the current gaming state is the low-probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure variation pattern determination table in FIG.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, and the number of times of the change of the special symbol is 1 to 31, the main CPU 101a refers to the special figure change pattern determination table of FIG. I do.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state and the number of times of the special symbol changes is 31 to 74, the main CPU 101a refers to the special figure change pattern determination table of FIG. I do.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, and the number of times the special symbol changes is 75 to 84 times, refer to the special figure change pattern determination table of FIG. I do.

  Further, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) when the current state is the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, or when the small hit is won.

  The special figure variation pattern determination table includes special figure stop design data reflecting the result of the special design determination and the type of the special design display device (starting port related to the special design display) that operates in the special design display, and the special design. The number of reservations (U1 or U2), a reach determination value for determining the presence or absence of reach, and a special figure variation pattern determination value for determining a special figure variation pattern are stored.

  When the special figure stop symbol data is “10H” to “17H”, or “20H” or “21H” (big hit, small hit), the main CPU 101a sets the game ball to the first starting port 6 or the second starting port. 7 is compared with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data, which is acquired when the ball is entered into the special figure fluctuation pattern. To determine.

  Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H” (loss), the main CPU 101a checks the number of special figure reservations (U1 or U2) related to the special figure variation pattern determination processing. . The main CPU 101a acquires the reach determination random number, compares it with the reach determination value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure reservation number (U1 or U2), Alternatively, it is determined whether the pattern is a special figure variation pattern of “losing with reach”.

  Although the maximum number of “4” may be stored as the number of special figure reservations, when the special figure variation pattern of “losing without reach” or the special figure variation pattern of “losing with reach” is determined. Does not refer to “4” as the number of reserved balls.

  When determining “reach with no reach”, the main CPU 101a compares the acquired random number for special figure variation pattern determination with the special figure variation pattern determination value (0 to 255) allocated according to “no loss with reach”. Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

  When determining the “losing with reach”, the main CPU 101a compares the acquired random number for the special figure variation pattern determination with the special figure variation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “losing with reach”. Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

  The main CPU 102a determines the special figure variation pattern by the special figure variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the start of the special symbol variation display (at the time of the special symbol storage determination processing in step S300).

  The special figure change pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for the special symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure change time”). In addition, the special figure change pattern is a first special figure change pattern which is a mode of the change display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a second special symbol display device 21 which is displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure change pattern which is a mode of change display of the 2 special symbols.

  The main CPU 101 a generates a special symbol variation pattern designation command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and transmits the command to the effect control board 102.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes a jackpot winning expectation (reliability) and a specific jackpot (for example, The expectation (reliability) of winning the first jackpot and the second jackpot is associated with each other.

  The sub CPU 102a of the effect control board 102 determines the effect contents based on the special figure variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101, as described later. In the rightmost column of the special pattern change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the effect type of the change effect determined by the sub CPU 102a is described in association with the special figure change pattern designation command for reference. ing.

  Here, as the effect contents, “design change” means that a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 14.

  In addition, the “reach” is a variation mode in which a combination of special effect symbols for notifying a jackpot is temporarily stopped and other special effect symbols fluctuate, thereby giving the player an expectation of the jackpot. Means For example, when a combination of three-digit special effect symbols of “777” is set as a combination of special effect symbols for notifying a jackpot, two special effect symbols are temporarily stopped at “7” and the remaining special effects are stopped. This refers to a mode in which the effect symbols fluctuate. The “temporary stop” refers to a mode in which the special effect symbol fluctuates or deforms slightly to indicate to the player that the special effect symbol is fluctuating.

  In the effect type of the variable effect shown in FIG. 9, “symbol change 1” to “symbol change 3” are “losing” as a result of the jackpot determination without being in the reach mode after a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. It is a variable production that notifies "Symbol variation 1" is "shortened variation" performed in a very short special figure variation time of 4 seconds. “Symbol variation 2” and “Symbol variation 3” are variation effects performed with special figure variation times of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

  The “normal reach” illustrated in FIG. 9 stops and displays two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after a symbol change that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. It is a variable production that performs a reach production.

  “Normal reach → Story reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect executed when the result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or small hit. This “normal reach → story reach” is a normal reach in which two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after a symbol change for displaying a plurality of special effect symbols. After that, story reach is performed as a reach production that has a higher expectation for big hits than normal reach. In this story reach, the character that appears also in the following challenge reach goes on a journey to find a pet dog that has disappeared, and finally finds a pet dog, suggesting that the jackpot determination result is the third jackpot or small hit Reach production consisting of a story of the content.

  “Pseudo-run 2 → Challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or small hit. This “pseudo ream 2 → challenge reach” stops and displays two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol fluctuates twice including the pseudo ream. The character that appears in Story Reach also challenges a treasure hunting game in which a character searches for a target item from a plurality of treasure chests, and when the character acquires the item, the result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a small jackpot. This is a challenge reach that suggests.

  Further, “pseudo-run 3 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a fluctuation effect in which the above-described challenge reach is performed after a symbol change including three pseudo-runs.

  “Normal reach → Super reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a pattern in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed, and then two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are given the same numerical value (for example, 7). This is a variable effect in which a normal reach for stop display is performed, and thereafter, a super reach having a higher degree of expectation for a jackpot than the normal reach is performed.

  “Normal reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 indicates that two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol have the same numerical value (for example, 7) after a symbol change for displaying a plurality of special effect symbols. This is a variable effect in which normal reach for stop display is performed, and then special reach having a higher degree of expectation for a jackpot than the above-described super reach is performed.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect in which a normal reach is performed, then a super reach is performed, and then a special reach is performed after a pattern change for displaying a plurality of special effect symbols is performed. is there.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special figure change pattern designation command determined in the case of the first big hit where the stop symbol data is “10H” is “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH” as can be seen from the special figure change pattern determination value. And "E6H0CH", the selection ratio increases. Similarly, the special figure change pattern designation command determined in the case of the second big hit where the stop symbol data is “11H” is “E6H0DH”, “E6H0EH”, “E6H0FH” as can be seen from the special figure change pattern determination value. ", The selection ratio increases.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of a loss in which the stop symbol data is “18H” is “E6H09H”, “E6H08H” as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. And "E6H07H", the selection ratio becomes lower.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH” as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the “normal reach → super reach” of “variation effect pattern A034” to “variation effect pattern A037”. Is executed, and when “E6H0BH” is received as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern A038” to “variation effect pattern A041” is executed. When it is determined to execute, and “E6H0CH” is received from the main control board 101 as a variation pattern designation command, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern A042” to “variation effect pattern A045” Decided to run To.

Later, as the variable effects of the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable effects of “variable effect pattern A034”, “variable effect pattern A038”, and “variable effect pattern A042” will be described.
Explaining the degree of expectation for the jackpot of “fluctuation effect pattern A034”, “fluctuation effect pattern A038”, and “fluctuation effect pattern A042”. “Variable effect pattern A034” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH”, “Variable effect of normal reach → special reach” executed when sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0BH” As the “pattern A038” and the “variable effect pattern A042” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0CH”, it can be said that the degree of expectation for the big hit increases.

  In addition, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 selected in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are special figure variation times of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. These special figure fluctuation times are “symbol fluctuation 1” to “symbol fluctuation 3” shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state, respectively. The special figure fluctuation time at the time of execution is shorter than 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds. In addition, the selection ratio of the “special figure variation pattern 30” for executing the “symbol variation 1”, which is the shortest special figure variation time of 2 seconds, is 4 tons in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of “special figure variation pattern 00” for executing “symbol variation 1” for seconds.

  In addition, “Symbol change → special character reach 1” to “symbol change → special character reach 6” illustrated in FIG. 10 are special characters that appear only in mode B, which will be described later, after a pattern change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. It is a fluctuating production that performs a special character reach. The details of the special character reach will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Further, in the effect type of the variable effect shown in FIG. 11, “symbol change 1” to “symbol change 3” are variable effects in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed, and a variable effect corresponding to a special figure variable time. Production time is different.

  “Symbol change → attack reach 1” to “symbol change → attack reach 6” shown in FIG. 11 are attack reach contents in which different characters attack each other after a pattern change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. It is a variable production that performs The details of the attack reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 does not have a special figure fluctuation pattern for executing a fluctuation effect of a very short time such as a special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12, “Janken production (losing 1)” to “Janken production (losing 6)”, “Janken production (win 1)” to “Janken production (win 3)”, “Janken production (Aiko 1)” "-" Janken production (Aiko 3) "is a display of two or more special production designs, which are changed and displayed, and then the two special production designs (left design and right design) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value (for example, 7). This is a variable effect in which a “Janken effect” in which two characters (an ally character and an opponent character) perform a Janken operation is generated.

“Janken effect (losing 1)” to “Janken effect (losing 6)” are variable effects that are executed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. “Janken effect (Win 1)” to “Janken effect (Win 3)” are variable effects executed when the result of the jackpot determination is the first jackpot or the second jackpot. “Janken effect (Aiko 1)” to “Janken effect (Aiko 3)” are variable effects executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “third big hit” or “small hit”.
The details of the “Janken effect” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

  Note that a starting opening winning designation command and a special figure change pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure change pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first advance determination or the second advance determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first advance determination or the second advance determination. The special figure variation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the special figure variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure variation pattern determination.

  The special figure variation pattern designation command is one byte for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. For the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is "E7H", 2 shows that the special symbol display device 21 performs a special symbol change display.

  Note that the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is “E6H” is called “first special figure fluctuation pattern specification command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is “E7H” is referred to as “second special figure fluctuation pattern specification command”. Special figure variation pattern designation command. "

  The starting port winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the starting port and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. Regarding the start port winning designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start port 7 Indicates that a game ball has entered. Note that the command for the starting opening winning designation command whose MODE data is "E1H" is a "first starting opening winning designating command", and the command for the starting opening winning designation whose MODE data is "E2H" is a "second starting opening winning designation command". "

  FIGS. 13A to 13F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning to the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game involving opening of the second starting port 7. The hit determination is performed based on a hit determination random number acquired based on the passing of the game balls through the winning gates 9 and 10, as described later.

  The winning determination table is divided according to the starting opening winning easiness. Specifically, the winning determination table is divided into a winning determination table referred to in the non-time saving game state and a winning determination table referred to in the time saving gaming state.

  Each hit determination table stores a hit determination value and a determination result uniquely associated with each other. By comparing the obtained hit determination random number with the hit determination table, one of “hit” and “loss” is determined. If a "win" is won, an auxiliary game involving opening of the second starting port 7 is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the ordinary symbol determination table. The ordinary symbol determination is to determine the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the result of the hit determination (hit and loss).

  In each ordinary symbol determination table, ordinary symbol determination values and ordinary symbols stopped and displayed are uniquely associated with each other and stored. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by comparing the random symbol for normal symbol determination acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal symbol determination table. As the identification information of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 13C determines a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “ordinary symbol variation pattern”) associated with the time required for the variation display of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, “ordinary symbol variation time”). FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a general-purpose variation pattern determination table for the present invention. The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-time saving game state and a general figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in the time reduction game state.

  In each of the tables, the ordinary figure variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of ordinary figure variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the universal figure variation pattern is determined by comparing the universal figure variation pattern determination random number acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10 with the universal figure variation pattern determination table. You.

  A general figure fluctuation pattern designation command is set corresponding to the general figure fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination. When the effect control board 102 receives the ordinary figure variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started from now on, and the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination related to the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be recognized. it can.

  The general figure fluctuation pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the game state related to the current starting opening winning easiness and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the general figure fluctuation pattern. I have. Regarding the normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “D6H”, it indicates that the game is in the non-time saving game state, and if the MODE data is “D7H”, it indicates that the game is in the time saving game state.

  FIG. 13D shows an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing the auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 13D, in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start opening winning easiness and the general symbol stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the ordinary symbol determination when the ordinary symbol determination is performed.

  FIG. 13E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The conditions for controlling the auxiliary game are stored in the auxiliary game control table. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the first opening of the second starting port 7 is performed, and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. An opening designation command, a type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second opening 7, an ending time that is a period from the end of the last opening of the second opening 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. Conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 13F is a diagram illustrating an example of a second start-up opening / closing control table for an auxiliary game used to control the opening / closing of the second start-up opening 7. The second start-up opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the second start-up opening 7 during the auxiliary game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7 include a normal power operation number (D), which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, and 2 The opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Description of types of special games)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game with the opening of the special winning opening 8 (the operation of the special winning opening control device 80) includes a “big hit game” executed when the “big hit” is won, and a “small hit”. And a "small hit game" that is executed when winning. The big hit game is mainly classified into a “first big hit game”, a “second big hit game”, and a “third big hit game” according to a difference in opening / closing mode of the big winning port 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the special winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter, referred to as a maximum opening number) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter, referred to as a maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason why "can be opened" is that the number of game balls that can enter the special winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, nine). Therefore, even if the special winning opening 8 has not been opened the maximum number of times, the special winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may be ended. Note that the maximum number of open times and the maximum open time of the special winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each jackpot game.

(Explanation of game conditions)
Next, a description will be given of a game condition that is a condition when the game proceeds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning easiness are set as the game conditions. Regarding the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability game state or high-probability game state, and the game progresses under the time-short game state or the non-time-short game state with respect to the easy opening of the game balls. I do. The initial (at power-on) game condition is set to a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state are referred to as a normal game state.

  In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state for the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to 1/350, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the high-probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state, that is, is set to 1/80, which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the low-probability gaming state, and the number of possible jackpots per unit time becomes relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the starting port winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-hours-saving gaming state, the time required for the normal symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the normal figure fluctuation time) is set to 15 seconds, and is activated when a "win" is won in the hit determination. (2) The total of the operation time of the start-up opening control device 70 (opening time of the second start-up opening 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning a hit in the normal symbol hit determination is 1 /. It means that it is set to 50. Note that the "total opening time" indicates that the second starting port 7 may be opened a plurality of times for one hit, and a game ball may be won for one hit. This is because the number of the game balls is limited, and when the game balls win, the game balls close without waiting for the opening time to elapse.

  On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting-port control device 70) is longer than in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Means a game state in which the game is likely to be in an open mode. Since the start opening winning easiness is relatively high, the number of executable second special symbol determinations per unit time is increased. Under the same jackpot probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time, the larger the number of jackpots per unit time inevitably. It can be said that the state is advantageous to the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total of the maximum opening time of the second starting port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, and Is set to 1/5. In other words, all the components of the starting port winning easiness are set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-time saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the second start-up port 7 is opened twice through the closing (interval) for 1.0 second, but may be opened once without the closing. Further, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting ports 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate firing handle 32. Even so, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the time-saving game state, it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-time-saving game state, so that a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player can be suppressed. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the time-saving gaming state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving gaming state.

  In this manner, the type of the jackpot game (first to third jackpot games), the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state, Or a combination with a time-saving gaming state). In view of this, the type of the substantial jackpot (the type of the jackpot based on the profit that the player enjoys) is the type of the jackpot game to be executed and the game condition ( Game state). Therefore, hereinafter, separately from the type of the jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, a combination of the type of the jackpot game guided by the jackpot and the game condition after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of the profit enjoyed by the player The type of jackpot.

  By the jackpot winning, a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) to execute a jackpot game (first jackpot game) and thereafter set to a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state is referred to as a “first jackpot”, By the winning, a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 4R (round) to execute a jackpot game (“second jackpot game”), and thereafter, the jackpot set to the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is referred to as “second jackpot”. A jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 2R (round) and the jackpot game is executed (“third jackpot game”), and thereafter, the jackpot set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is referred to as “third jackpot”.

  In addition, when a big hit is won, the normal game state is set when the big hit game starts regardless of the state before the big hit game. In other words, during the jackpot game, the game is in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state. On the other hand, even if the small hit is won, the game condition does not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning is continued during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the startup program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to power-on. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command indicating that the initialization process has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S700 described later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure variation random number for determining the special figure variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number composed of a jackpot determination initial value random number, a special symbol determination initial value random number, a hit determination initial value random number, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt process is executed by generating a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves information stored in a register of the main CPU 101a to a stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game timer counter for performing a process of updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol, a process of updating the stop time of the special symbol, a process of updating the opening time, a process of updating the opening and closing time of the special winning opening 8, and the like. In addition, a time control process for updating the auxiliary game timer counter for performing a process of updating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, a process of updating the stop time of the normal symbol, and a process of updating the opening and closing time of the second starting port 7 is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a random number for big hit determination, a random number for special symbol determination, and a random number for hit determination.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number updating process for updating the initial value random number for jackpot determination, the initial value random number for special symbols, and the initial value random number for hit determination.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”, and each random number value is newly added from the initial random number at that time. Update to

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process of determining whether a new valid signal has been transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a executes the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol reservation display device 23, the second special symbol reservation display device 24, and the special winning opening control device 80. Special power control processing (special symbol processing) for performing the control (control of the special symbol system). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a general figure control process (normal) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Pattern processing).

  The main CPU 101a loads the value of the general-purpose general-purpose processing data in this general-purpose general-purpose control processing (normal symbol-related processing), refers to the branch address from the loaded general-purpose general-purpose processing data, and executes If the processing data = 0, a normal symbol determination as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (the second starting port 7 is open) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning in the winning gates 9 and 10 The normal symbol storage determination process including the normal symbol display process data is performed, and if the normal symbol general electric process data = 1, the normal symbol variation process when the normal symbol display device 22 is changed based on the normal symbol determination is performed. If the normal power processing data = 2, the normal symbol stop processing when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped is performed, and if the normal power general processing data = 3, the opening / closing control of the second start port 7 is performed. (2) Operation of the start-up port control device 70) Carry out the management.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the prize ball counters corresponding to the starting ports (the first starting port 6, the second starting port 7), the special winning opening 8 and the general winning opening 11 have exceeded “0”. Is checked, and if it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning port is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process of subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a outputs external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, a second start opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a special winning opening / closing solenoid. Drive control data (starting opening / closing solenoid driving data and special winning opening / closing solenoid driving data) for driving the 80B, and predetermined symbols on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the holding display devices 23, 24, 25. Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, special symbol suspension display data, ordinary symbol suspension display data) for display is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs an output control process. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to turn on the LEDs of the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25, a display device output process of outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. . Finally, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to a register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the detection signal is not input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S220. When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a adds and updates predetermined data to a general winning opening prize ball counter used for a prize ball.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 8. When the detection signal is not input from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S230. When a detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to a special winning opening prize ball counter used for a prize ball, updates the data, and updates the special winning opening 8 with a prize. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the first starting port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signals from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a have been input, that is, whether or not the game balls have passed through the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first starting port detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether there is a valid detection signal from the first starting port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, in step S232, the starting opening prize ball counter is updated by adding “1”, and the first starting entrance ball of the main RAM 101c is updated. The first starting port winning flag is turned on in the flag storage area.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure reservation number counter for counting the first special figure reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). When determining that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and when determining that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure reservation is performed in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is updated by adding "1". In step S234, the main CPU 101a updates the special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds to update the first special symbol hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23 with the main RAM 101c. To a predetermined area.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a transmits the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number counter to the first special It is stored in the symbol hold storage area.

  The first special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are stored in the storage sections in which the random numbers are not stored. The data is stored sequentially from the smaller storage unit. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a performs a first preliminary determination based on a game ball entering the first starting port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first preliminary determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol holding storage area, The first special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure variation pattern as the first preliminary determination before performing the special figure variation pattern determination process (S313).

  Then, in step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first starting port winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the second starting port detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a. When determining that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and when determining that there is a valid detection signal, moves the process to step S242.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a adds and updates the starting opening prize ball counter by "1", adds and updates the second starting opening entrance counter by "1", and updates the starting opening prize ball counter of the main RAM 101c. The second starting port entrance flag is turned on in the winning flag storage area. The second start-up ball entry regulation counter counts the number of winnings to the second start-up opening 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 7 for one auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter for counting the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). When determining that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the process, and when determining that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, moves the process to step S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value (U2) of the second special figure reservation number counter by adding “1” thereto. Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds in order to update the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 in the main RAM 101c. To a predetermined area.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a outputs the special determination information including the random numbers indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number counter to the second special It is stored in the symbol hold storage area.

  The second special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are stored in a storage section where no random number is stored. The data is stored sequentially from the smaller storage unit. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  Then, the main CPU 101a makes a second preliminary determination based on the ball entering the second starting port 7 in step S246. Here, the second preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second preliminary determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol holding storage area, A second special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure variation pattern as the second preliminary determination before performing the special figure variation pattern determination process (step S313).

  Then, in step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure variation pattern determined by the second preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the winning gate detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensors 9a, 10a. When determining that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and when determining that there is a valid detection signal, moves the process to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the ordinary symbol reservation number counter for counting the number of ordinary symbol reservations (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit). When determining that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the process, and when determining that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, moves the process to step S253.

  In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds and updates the counter value (G) of the ordinary drawing reservation number counter by “1”. In addition, in step S253, the main CPU 101a stores the ordinary symbol holding display data indicating the number of held symbols in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the number of ordinary symbols held (G) displayed on the ordinary symbol holding display device 25. set.

  The main CPU 101a stores the random numbers indicated by the random number counter for hit determination, the random number counter for normal symbol determination, and the random number counter for general symbol variation pattern determination in the normal symbol holding storage area in step S254, and performs the winning gate detection signal input processing. To end.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section (see FIG. 14C), and various random numbers are stored in a storage section having a smaller number among storage sections in which random numbers are not stored. Are stored sequentially. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 14D).

  Next, the special figure special power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special power processing data is loaded, and in step S302, the branch address is referenced from the special figure special power processing data, and if the special figure special power processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310). If the special figure special power processing data = 1, the processing is shifted to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step S320), and if the special figure special power processing data = 2, the processing is shifted to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If the special figure special power processing data = 3, the processing is shifted to the big hit game processing (step S340). If the special figure special power processing data = 4, the processing is shifted to the small hit game processing (step S350). If data = 5, the processing is shifted to the jackpot game end processing (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the special symbol storage determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a special symbol is being changed and displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol is being changed and displayed, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If it determines that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed, the process proceeds to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not one or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is one or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Transfer processing.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol holding number counter by subtracting “1” in step S310-3, and shifts the data stored in the second special symbol holding storage area in step S310-6. The process is performed, and each data stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit.

  For example, data stored in the fourth storage section of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special symbol storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage section) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. As a result, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination used in the previous game are deleted. Further, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each of them.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. When the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol holding number counter by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and shifts the data stored in the first special symbol holding storage area in step S310-6. I do.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage section), and the data stored in the 0th storage section is deleted. Is done. Thereby, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special figure variation pattern determination used in the previous game are deleted. Further, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each of them.

  In order to update the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2) along with the data shift processing (reservation digestion processing) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the starting port related to the data. The suspension display data includes information on the type of the special symbol suspension display device and information on the number of special symbol suspensions (U1 or U2).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted with priority over the first special symbol holding storage area. The first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area may be shifted in the order in which the balls are entered, or the first special symbol holding storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol holding storage area. You may let it.

  If it is determined in step S310-4 that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not one or more, the process proceeds to a customer waiting state setting process in steps S319-1 to S319-3. First, in step S319-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the demonstration determination flag "01H" is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. When the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, the special symbol storage determination processing ends, and when the demonstration determination flag “01H” is not set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. The process moves to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demonstration determination flag "01H" in the demonstration determination flag storage area so that the demonstration designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets the demonstration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination processing.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes a jackpot determination process based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the zeroth storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is to be performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 6.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that the opening is the first starting port 6, the main CPU 101a selects the first special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is not the first starting port 6 (it is the second starting port 7), in step S311-3, it selects the second special symbol jackpot determination table.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is set in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is ON in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high-probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "First high probability jackpot determination table" or "second high probability jackpot determination table" is selected.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high-probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the main CPU 101a further selects "first low probability" from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "Big jackpot determination table" or "second low probability jackpot determination table" is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a replaces the random number for jackpot determination shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0-th storage unit with the "high probability jackpot" selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. It is checked with the "decision table" or the "low probability jackpot determination table" to determine which of "big hit", "small hit" and "losing", and ends the big hit determination processing.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, the special symbols stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 are determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

Here, the special symbol determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is "big hit". Here, if it is determined to be a "big hit", the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for a big hit in step S312-3, and if it is not determined to be a "big hit", the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S312. Transfer the process to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is "small hit". Here, when it is determined to be "small hit", the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S312-4, and when not determined to be "small hit", shifts the processing to step S312-5.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the starting port winning flag storage area (the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7), In S310-6, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for the jackpot winning (FIG. 5 (a)), whereby the special jackpot special symbol is determined. The special symbol to be determined is determined.

  In step 312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the starting port winning flag storage area (first starting port 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. The special symbol for determining the special symbol for small hits by comparing the random number for special symbol determination in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for small hit winning (FIG. 5B). Make a decision.

  In step 312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the starting port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the starting port winning flag storage area (the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7), and In S310-6, the special symbol for random determination is determined by comparing the random number for special symbol determination in the zeroth storage unit with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for loss (FIG. 5B). To make a special symbol determination.

  Then, in step S312-6, a special effect design specification command is determined based on the result of the special design determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5, and the determined special effect design specification command is directed. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-7, the main CPU 101a determines, based on the results of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, S312-4, and S312-5, stop symbol data relating to the special symbol (hereinafter, “special symbol stop”). This is referred to as "symbol data"), that is, the type of the special symbol is determined, and the determined special symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  The determined special figure stop symbol data is used to determine the special figure change pattern in the special figure change pattern determination processing of FIG. 25, as described later, in the special symbol stop processing of FIG. When determining the "special symbol" or the like, it is also used in determining the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG.

  In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a sets the game condition data by comparing the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks the high probability flag storage area and selects a game condition data determination table according to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the game condition data is determined by comparing the special figure stop symbol data with the selected game condition data determination table, and is stored in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination processing is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination processing illustrated in FIG. 22, and performs the special figure variation pattern determination processing in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination, the time required for the variation display of the special symbol (to be performed) (hereinafter referred to as a special figure variation time) and A special figure change pattern including information on the effect type and the like of a change effect described later is determined.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the ON or OFF of the high probability flag and the ON or OFF of the time reduction flag in the game condition determination table of FIG. Game state, low-probability game state, time-saving game state, or non-time-saving game state).

  In step S313-2, if the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S313-3, and the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to the high-probability gaming state and other than the time-saving gaming state. If it is a gaming state, the process proceeds to step S13-4.

  In step S313-3, in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a changes the number of times of change display of the special symbol to be started (1 to 30 times, 31 to 74 times, 75 to 84 times). Times).

  In step S313-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 or the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (in step S313-2). YES), the special figure variation pattern determination table is selected according to the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol confirmed in step S313-4.

  In step S313-5, the main CPU 101a checks the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

  If the special figure stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H”, that is, if the result of the special symbol lottery is “losing”, the main CPU 101a further performs the special figure variation pattern determination process. Check the number of reservations (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a acquires the reach determination random number, compares it with the reach determination random number value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure reservation number (U1 or U2), and obtains the special map of “no reach loss”. It is determined whether the pattern is a fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern of “losing with reach”.

  In step S313-6, the main CPU 101a determines a special figure variation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 101a acquires the to-figure variation pattern determination random number, and stores the acquired to-figure variation pattern determination random number and the determination value (0 to 255) stored in the to-figure variation pattern determination table. Collation is performed to determine a special figure change pattern.

After determining the special figure variation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 22, and in step S310-7, transmits a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern to the main RAM 101c for production. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the variation display of the special symbol starts by receiving this command, and finally designates the special figure variation pattern designation. A variable effect pattern associated with the content of the variable effect is determined based on the command.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the game condition at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and sets a game state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  Then, in step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure variation time (see FIGS. 9 to 12) associated with the special figure variation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data for performing variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be activated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  The main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the demonstration determination flag storage area in step S310-11, that is, clears the demonstration determination flag storage area, and sets the special figure special power processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol storage determination process ends.

Next, the special symbol changing process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation display in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the special symbol change display is not ended, the special symbol change process is ended and the next subroutine is executed.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol change display is to be ended, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a sets a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the special symbol change display is to be ended. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a performs special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop design data set in step S312-13 to stop and display the special design on the special design display devices 20 and 21. Is set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets a time required for the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, “special figure stop time”; for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. It should be noted that the special game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special power processing data.

  In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first starting opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag, and ends the special symbol changing process.

Next, the special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends, in other words, whether or not the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed ( Special game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display does not end, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol stop processing, and when it determines that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2. Transfer processing.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is set in the time saving flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area means that the game is currently in the time saving game state. If the flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is OFF in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a calculates the remaining number of times of the special symbol change display according to the time saving game state (J: hereinafter referred to as “remaining time saving game state number”) from the counter value of the remaining time counter in the time saving game state to “1”. Is subtracted and stored as the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J) = 0. If the number of remaining time-saving game states (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining number of time-saving game states (J) = 0 does not hold, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. In addition, the fact that the number of remaining time saving game states (J) becomes “0” means that the number of times the special symbol can be changed (Ja) is executed in the time saving game state, and the number of times that the special symbol varies according to the “time saving” state is displayed. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag has been turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is currently in the high-probability gaming state. If the flag is ON in the high-probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is OFF in the high-probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a sets the counter value of the high-probability game state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special symbol change display according to the high-probability game state (X: hereinafter, referred to as “high-probability game state remaining number”). The calculated value (X-1) obtained by subtracting "1" from the stored value is stored as a new high-probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0. If the high-probability game state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the high-probability game state remaining number (X) = 0 does not hold, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. In addition, the fact that the high-probability gaming state remaining number (X) becomes “0” means that the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed (Xa) in the high-probability gaming state, and the special symbol in the “high-probability” state Means that the variable display is ended.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command indicating the game state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol stop processing is "big hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the special jackpot symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). I do. Here, if it is determined to be a special jackpot, the process proceeds to step S330-14, and if it is not determined to be a special jackpot, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop processing is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, if it is determined that the small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-17, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the special figure special power processing data.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the game condition flag storage area (the time saving flag storage area and the high probability flag storage area), the remaining change frequency counter of the high probability game state, and the remaining change frequency counter of the time reduction game state. I do.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special power processing data, and shifts the processing to step S330-16.

Next, the jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the opening is currently being performed. The opening here refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the special winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the opening is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, it is determined which jackpot is the big hit according to the special figure stop symbol data, and a big winning opening opening / closing control table according to the type of the big hit is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, a long winning game large winning opening opening / closing control table or a short winning gaming large winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c according to the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the value. Since no round game has been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game number storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value (the special power operation number (K)) stored in the special power operation number storage area and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a sets the special winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to open the special winning opening 8 by energizing the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special power operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 8 ( The operation time of the special winning opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and if K = 1, a round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is for transmitting information to the effect control board 102 that a round game is started. For example, at the time of the first opening of the first round game of the long hit game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special power operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special power operation number storage area, the jackpot game process ends without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case of K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits the round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, a display for the effect is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. The ending here means a period from the end of all round games set in advance (after the last opening of the special winning opening 8 ends) to the end of the big hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the ending is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-17, and it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-7. Transfer processing to

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the special winning opening control device 80 is operating. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning opening 8 is being opened, in step S340-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether the “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. I do. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0. ) Has been adopted. Then, when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. The special winning opening closing process sets the power stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and opens and closes the special winning opening determined in step 340-3. With reference to the control table, the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current round number (R) and the special power operation number (K). As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether one round game has been completed. Specifically, in one round game, the special power operation number (K) is equal to the number of open times set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9 pieces). ), The condition is terminated, and it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. When it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12, and when it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is completed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in the step S340-7 that the special winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset closing time has elapsed in a step S340-11. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process ends, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special power operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, shifts the processing to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game end process. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, the type of the jackpot is confirmed according to the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending designation command associated with the type of the jackpot to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the ending time according to the type of the jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-18, where the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the game has not been completed, the jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 in the special figure special power processing data, and shifts the processing to the big hit game end processing shown in FIG.

  Next, the small hitting game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the opening is currently being performed. If it is determined that the opening is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S350-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hitting game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a special winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the special winning opening / closing control table for the small winning game.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the special winning opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the value (special power operation number (K)) stored in the special power operation number storage area and stored. Then, in order to open the special winning opening 8, the energization start data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set, and the current special electric power activation is referred to by referring to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in the step 350-3. The opening time of the special winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hitting game is ended.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. The ending here is a period from the end of opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hitting game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-13 when it is determined that the ending is currently being performed, and moves to step S350-6 when it is determined that the ending is not currently being performed.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is being opened. When determining that the special winning opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-10, and when determining that the special winning opening 8 is open, the process proceeds to step S350-7. Then, it is determined whether or not “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) or one open time of the special winning opening 8 has elapsed (special game timer counter). = 0). Then, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S350-8 when determining that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, and ends the small hitting game processing when determining that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied. I do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set to close the special winning opening 8, and the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in the step 350-3 is referred to. The closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current special power operation number (K). As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hitting game ending condition is satisfied. The small hitting game ending condition is that the special power operation number (K) is the number of times the large winning opening 8 is opened in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9). It has been reached. Then, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S350-11 if it is determined that the small hitting game ending condition is satisfied, and shifts the processing to step S350-11 if it is determined that the small hitting game ending condition is not satisfied. To end.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” to the special power operation number storage area and sets “0” to the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hitting game end processing. That is, the special power operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the type of the small hit in the transmission data storage area for effect based on the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the ending time corresponding to the type of the small hit. Is set in the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. The closing time is also determined based on whether or not the special game timer counter is 0, as in the case of the opening time. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hitting game process, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, shifts the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-14, in which the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the game has not been performed, the small hitting game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special figure special power processing data.

Next, the jackpot game end processing will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a compares the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. When determining that the high probability flag is not ON, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S360-4, and when determining that the high probability flag is ON, in step S360-3, stores the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a compares the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is turned on in the time-saving flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not to be turned on, the process proceeds to step S360-6. If it determines that the time reduction flag is to be turned on, the main CPU 101a stores the time reduction flag (01H) in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time as turning on, the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time saving game state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, sets a game state designation command indicating the current state of the game condition in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S360-7, The figure special power processing data is set to 0, and the processing shifts to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

(Main processing by the production control board)
Next, a process executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main processing of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b and performs a process of initializing the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of updating an effect random number used for controlling an effect including a random number for special effect determination, a random number for fluctuation effect pattern determination, a random number for effect mode determination, and the like.

  It should be noted that a random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the effect random number. In the process of updating the effect random number, the random number counter provided for each type of random number is incremented by "1". Various random numbers constituting the effect random number have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of the random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random numbers from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to be able to prevent the random number counters related to the production random numbers from completely synchronizing, instead of making the maximum values of various random number ranges different, different initial value random numbers are provided for various production random numbers, When updating the random numbers, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, each random number value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by effect control board)
A clock pulse is generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102, so that a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is executed.

  In this timer interrupt process, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs a time control process of updating each timer counter for managing time related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in a reception buffer. Thereafter, a process of analyzing the received command in step S1300 is performed.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect input control process. Details of the effect input control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs a data output process of transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by the production control board)
The command analysis process performed by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a receives a new command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. When determining that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process, and shifts the process to step S1302 when determining that the command has been received.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a demonstration designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a demonstration designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303, and shifts to step S1304 if it determines that the command is not a demonstration designation command.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect standby flag in the demonstration effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as a pre-process for executing the demonstration effect, and sets a time period until the demonstration effect starts (demonstration effect standby). ) Is set in the demonstration effect timer counter, and the command analysis processing ends.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not the starting opening winning designation command, moves the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs a start opening winning designation command storage process. The sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning designation command in the effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c in the starting opening winning designation command storage processing.

  The effect information storage area is provided for each type of starting port (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start-up winning specification command, confirms the type of the start-up opening (the first startup opening 6 or the second startup opening 7) associated with the start-up winning designation command, and determines the type of the startup opening. Is stored in the effect information storage area corresponding to.

  Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section for each type of the starting ports 6 and 7. The starting opening winning designation command is stored in order from a storage unit having a smaller number in a storage unit in which the starting opening winning designation command is not stored.

  In addition, each storage unit stores a start opening winning designation command unit that stores a starting opening winning designation command, and effect data of an effect performed based on the starting opening winning designation command stored in the start opening winning designation command unit. And an effect data storage unit.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the game state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1307, and shifts the processing to step S1308 when determining that there is no game state specification command.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a sets the game state data indicated by the received game state designation command in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol designating command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1309, and if it determines that there is no special effect symbol designating command, shifts the processing to step S1310.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a configures a special figure lottery effect, which is performed when the special symbol stop display is performed, and for performing the special effect symbol stop display indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. The special effect symbol pattern determination processing is performed, and the command analysis processing ends. In the special effect design pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect design specification command, and based on the information included in the received special effect design specification command, causes the special effect to stop and display in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. The arrangement (combination) of the decorative symbols arranged on the predetermined activated line in the stop display of the symbols, that is, the special effect symbols is determined.

  In step S1310, sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1311. If it determines that there is no special figure variation pattern designation command, it shifts the processing to step S1312. .

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a configures a special figure lottery effect, which is performed when the special symbol variable display is performed, and indicates a variable effect indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (variable display of the special effect symbol is performed). (Including a variable effect pattern) to determine a variable effect pattern, and terminates the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command, it moves the process to steps S1313 and S1314, and if it determines that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, it proceeds to step S1315. Transfer processing.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating stop display of the special effect symbol in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the special effect symbol stop control command, recognize that the variable effect is finished, terminate the variable effect, and stop display of the special effect symbol. . The end time of the present effect is not limited to this, and may be a specific timing related to a preset event in the effect during the variable effect.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a clears the effect data stored in the sub RAM 102c described below.

  In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode when the end of the special symbol change display, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode (category) of the variable effect performed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to the special symbol lottery (or the variable display of the special symbol). , Game conditions and the like.
I will describe.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command for a special game. When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1316, and shifts the process to step S1317 when determining that there is no special game opening designation command.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern that is a mode of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1318, and shifts the processing to step S1319 when determining that there is no round designation command.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command for a special game (special game ending designation command). When determining that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1320, and terminates the command analysis processing when determining that the command is not the special game ending designation command.

  In step S1320, sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern that is an ending effect mode, and ends the command analysis process.

  Here, a description will be given of a variable effect pattern determination table used in a variable effect pattern determination process (FIG. 35) described later. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a sets the special figure variation pattern designation command and the effect mode set in the current game state. A process for determining a variation effect pattern is performed from the associated variation effect pattern determination table.

FIG. 40 shows a variable effect pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state described later.
FIG. 41 shows a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode B set in the high-probability gaming state and the special figure variation frequency of 1 to 30 times in the time-saving gaming state, which will be described later. Is shown.
FIG. 42 shows a variable effect pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode C set in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state in which the special figure change frequency is 31 to 74 times. Is shown.
FIG. 43 shows a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode D set in the high probability game state and the special figure change frequency of 75 to 84 times in the time saving game state, which will be described later. Is shown.

  The fluctuation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 include a special symbol determination result (judgment result of jackpot determination), a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, and a variation corresponding to the special figure variation time Based on the effect time (s) of the effect, the variable effect pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the variable effect pattern, the variable effect pattern determined according to the variable effect pattern determination value, and the variable effect pattern The effect contents of the variable effects are stored in association with the presence / absence (execution (o), non-execution (x)) of each special effect in the variable effects based on the variable effect patterns.

(Fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A)
The variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state in FIG. 40 indicates the player's expectation as to whether or not the first big hit or the second big hit is won. In order to give the first jackpot or the second jackpot, as a variable effect pattern having different expectations, a variable effect pattern in which super reach is executed after execution of normal reach and a variable effect pattern in which special reach is executed after execution of normal reach And a variable effect of executing super reach after execution of normal reach and then executing special reach.
Further, in order to give the player an expectation of whether or not to win the third jackpot or the small hit, a variable effect pattern in which story reach is executed after execution of normal reach, and a variable effect pattern in which challenge reach is executed after execution of normal reach. And

  As shown in the fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A in FIG. 40, when the special symbol determination result is "losing", "E6H00H" or "E7H00H" is determined as the special figure fluctuating pattern designation command. , Any one of “fluctuation effect pattern A001” to “fluctuation effect pattern A003” is determined.

  In the variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A001” to “variable effect patterns A003”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the variable effect time as short as 4 seconds (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1- 3)), which is a variable effect informing that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, if “E6H01H” or “E7H01H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern A004” to “variation effect pattern A006” Either is determined.

  In the variable effect of “variable effect pattern A004” to “variable effect pattern A006”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the variable effect time of 8 seconds (“symbol change A2-1” to “symbol change A2-3”). "), Which is a variable effect informing that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, when “E6H02H” or “E7H02H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern A007” to “variation effect pattern A009” Either is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect pattern A007” to “variable effect pattern A009” are a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 12 seconds (“symbol change A3-1” to “symbol change A3-3”). ), A variable effect that notifies that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If "E6H03H" or "E7H03H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any one of "variation effect pattern A010" to "variation effect pattern A012" Is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A010” to “variable effect patterns A012” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-3”), and 2 of the special effect symbols. Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-3”) in which three symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value, and a fluctuation that notifies that the jackpot determination result is a loss. It is a production.

  If "E6H07H" or "E7H07H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any of "variation effect pattern A022" to "variation effect pattern A025" Is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A022” to “variable effect patterns A025” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and the special effect symbols 2 Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value is performed, and thereafter, the super reach (the higher degree of expectation for the jackpot than the normal reach) is performed. “Super reach A1-1” to “super reach A1-4”), and a variation effect of notifying that the jackpot determination result is a loss.

  In a case where the special symbol determination result is a loss, if “E6H08H” or “E7H08H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, one of “variation effect pattern A026” to “variation effect pattern A029” Is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A026” to “variable effect patterns A029” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and the special effect symbols 2 Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value is performed, and thereafter, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher than the normal reach and the super reach. This is a fluctuation effect in which special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") is performed and the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  If the special symbol determination result is "losing" and "E6H09H" or "E7H09H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designating command, any one of "variation effect pattern A030" to "variation effect pattern A033" Is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect pattern A030” to the “variable effect pattern A033” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and two of the special effect symbols. Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value is performed, and thereafter, the super reach (the higher degree of expectation for the jackpot than the normal reach) is performed. After performing “Super Reach A1-1” to “Super Reach A1-4”), the special reach (“Special Reach A1-1” to “Special Reach A1-4”) having higher expectation for the jackpot than Super Reach Is performed to notify that the jackpot determination result is a loss.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, if “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern A034” to “variation effect pattern A037” Either is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect pattern A034” to the “variable effect pattern A037” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and 2 of the special effect symbols. Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value is performed, and thereafter, the super reach (the higher degree of expectation for the jackpot than the normal reach) is performed. “Super reach A1-1” to “super reach A1-4”), and a variation effect that informs that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first big hit and “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any of “variation effect pattern A038” to “variation effect pattern A041” Either is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect pattern A038” to the “variable effect pattern A041” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and 2 of the special effect symbols. Normal reach (“Normal reach A1-1” to “Normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value is performed, and thereafter, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher than the normal reach and the super reach. This is a fluctuation effect in which special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") is performed and the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When "E6H0CH" or "E7H0CH" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designating command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, among "variation effect pattern A042" to "variation effect pattern A045" Either is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns A042” to “variable effect patterns A045” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-4”), and the special effect symbols 2 Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value is performed, and thereafter, the super reach (the higher degree of expectation for the jackpot than the normal reach) is performed. After performing “Super Reach A1-1” to “Super Reach A1-4”), the special reach (“Special Reach A1-1” to “Special Reach A1-4”) having higher expectation for the jackpot than Super Reach Is performed to notify that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variable effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except for the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed.

  When "E6H10H" or "E7H10H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, one of "variation effect pattern A058" to "variation effect pattern A060" Either is determined.

  The variable effects of “variable effect pattern A058” to “variable effect pattern A060” are a plurality of special effect symbols that are displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change A1-1” to “symbol change A1-3”), and the special effect symbols 2 The character reaches the normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-3”) in which three symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value, and thereafter, as described above, the character that also appears in the challenge reach Go out on a journey to find a pet dog whose disappearance disappears, and finally find a pet dog to indicate that the result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a small jackpot. A story reach (“Story reach A1-1”) "~" Story reach A1-3 "), and is a fluctuating effect that informs that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. .

  As described above, after the symbol variation including two pseudo-runs (“pseudo-run 2”), the character is selected from the plurality of treasure chests in the “variation effect pattern A061” to the “variation effect pattern A063”. Challenge Reach ("Challenge Reach A1--"), in which a challenge is made to a treasure hunting game in which the character acquires the item, and the result of the jackpot determination indicates that the result is the third jackpot or small hit. 1 "to" Challenge Reach A1-3 "), and a fluctuation effect for notifying that the result of the big hit determination is a third big hit or a small hit.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect patterns A064” to “variation effect patterns A066”, the character is referred to as a cape of a target item from a plurality of treasure chests after a symbol change including three pseudo runs (“pseudo run 3”). Challenge reach ("Challenge reach A2-1" to "Challenge reach A2-", which indicates that the result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a small jackpot depending on the item acquired by the character by challenging the treasure hunting game. 3)), and a variation effect of notifying that the result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variable effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode A, “variation effect pattern A001” to “variation effect pattern A072” have special effects of “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, “development notice A”, “decision”. Information indicating that the effect "A" is executed (o) and not executed (x) is associated.

  Here, as described later, the “line announcement” means that a rendering image in which a character described later speaks any of a plurality of lines having different degrees of expectation for the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 14 so that the jackpot game is played. This is an announcement effect that informs the user of the possibility of executing the game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as described later, any one of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” of “Serif notice A” is executed as “Serif notice”.

  In addition, as described later, the “character announcement” indicates the possibility of executing the jackpot game by displaying any image of a plurality of characters having different degrees of expectation for the jackpot on the image display device 14 as described later, This is an announcement effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as described later, any one of “character announcement A1” to “character announcement A5” of “character announcement A” is executed as “character announcement”.

  In addition, the “development notice” depends on the state of the first effect button 18A (non-projecting state or projecting state) or the type of effect image displayed based on the operation of the first effect button 18A, as described later. In addition to announcing the possibility of developing from the current production to the next production that has a higher degree of expectation for the jackpot, and notifying the possibility of executing the jackpot game, the expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot It is a notice effect to give. In the effect mode A, as described later, “development notice A1” or “development notice A2” of “development notice A” is executed as “development notice”.

  In addition, the “determined effect” is an effect that informs the determination of the jackpot hit, as described later. When the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won, the first decorative member 17A is moved. In the case of loss, the effect is that the first decorative member 17A is not operated. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, “determined effect A1” or “determined effect A2” of “determined effect A” is executed as “determined effect”.

As shown in FIG. 40, for example, when the special symbol determination result is “fluctuating effect pattern A034”, execution of “line notice A”, “character notice A”, “development notice A” (○), “fixed effect A” "Is associated with information indicating non-execution (×).
If the “variable effect pattern A034” is determined in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process to be described later, the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1311-6 that “special effect notice A” and “character notice A” are special effects. , Confirm that the “advance notice A” is to be executed.

The fluctuating effect performed in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state, in which the jackpot is more likely to be won than in the low-probability game state and the non-time-short game state, is a simple effect that is not overpowered by the notice effect.
In addition, the maximum of 84 fluctuating effects performed in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are effect modes B performed with 1 to 30 special figure fluctuation times, and 31 special figure fluctuation times to 30 times so as not to be redundant. Different effects are performed in the effect mode C performed 74 times and in the effect mode D performed 75 to 84 times as the number of times of changing the special figure.

(Fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B)
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B in FIG. 41 is a high-probability game state and a time-short game state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low-probability game state and the non-time-short game state. Is a fluctuation effect pattern of the fluctuation effect executed when the special figure fluctuation frequency is 1 to 30 times.

  In such a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the player usually has an expectation that it will be easy to win a jackpot. Therefore, in the effect mode B, in order to give the player an expectation that the jackpot will be won in an early period in which the number of special figure changes is small, the fluctuation of the effect mode A is changed in the special figure change number of 1 to 30 times. The effect content is to perform a simple fluctuating effect than the effect.

  In the effect mode B, if the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure change time is longer than the special mode change time so that the change effect of the next special figure change number is immediately executed at a high rate. Have a variable effect pattern of the variable effect at a high rate of 2 seconds. In addition, when the game develops to reach after the special effect symbol changes, only the "special character reach", in which characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other, is executed.

  As shown in the fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B in FIG. 41, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, “E6H30H” or “E7H30H” is determined as the special figure fluctuating pattern designation command. , “Fluctuation effect pattern B001” or “fluctuation effect pattern B002” is determined.

  In the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern B001” and the “variation effect pattern B002”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the fluctuation effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol fluctuation B1-1”, “symbol fluctuation B1- 2)), a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, when “E6H31H” or “E7H31H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B003” or “variation effect pattern B004” is determined. You. In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, when “E6H32H” or “E7H32H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B005” or “variation effect pattern B006” is determined. You.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns B003” to “variable effect patterns B006” are displayed by changing a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol change B2-1”, “symbol change B2-2”, “symbol change B3-1”). , "Symbol variation B3-2"), a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If the special symbol determination result is “losing” and “E6H33H” or “E7H33H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B007” or “variation effect pattern B008” is determined.

  Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H34H” or “E7H34H” is determined, the “variation effect pattern B009” or “variation effect pattern B010” is changed to the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H35H” or “ When “E7H35H” is determined, the “fluctuating effect pattern B011” or “fluctuating effect pattern B012” is set, and when the special figure changing pattern designating command “E6H36H” or “E7H36H” is determined, the “fluctuating effect pattern” is set. In the case where “B013” or “fluctuating effect pattern B014” is determined to be the special figure fluctuation pattern designating command “E6H37H” or “E7H37H”, “fluctuating effect pattern B015” or “fluctuating effect pattern B016” is changed to the special figure fluctuation. Pattern specification command “E6H38H Or when "E7H38H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern B017" or "variations demonstration pattern B018" is determined, respectively.

  The variable effects of “variable effect pattern B007” to “variable effect pattern B018” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change B3-1”, “symbol change B3-2”, “symbol change B2-1”). , "Symbol variation B2-2"), and then special characters ("Special character reach B4-1", "Special character reach B4-2", "Special character reach B5-1", "Special character reach") in which special characters appear Special character reach B5-2, Special character reach B6-1, Special character reach B6-2, Special character reach B1-1, Special character reach B1-2, Special character reach B2- 1), “Special Character Reach B2-2”, “Special Character Reach B3-1”, “Special Character Reach B3-2”), and a fluctuation performance that notifies that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. It is.

  If the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, and “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B019” or “variation effect pattern B020” is determined. You.

  Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designating command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” is determined, the “fluctuating production pattern B021” or “fluctuating production pattern B022” becomes the special figure variation pattern designating command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH”. Is determined, the "fluctuation effect pattern B023" or the "fluctuation effect pattern B024" is determined.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect pattern B019” to “variation effect pattern B024”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed (“design variation B3-1”, “design variation B3-2”), and then the special character is displayed. Appearing special character reach ("Special character reach B1-1", "Special character reach B1-2", "Special character reach B2-1", "Special character reach B2-2", "Special character reach B3-1" , “Special character reach B3-2”) to notify that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variable effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except for the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed.

  When the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, and “E6H3FH” or “E7H3FH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B031” or “variation effect pattern B032” is determined. You.

  Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern specifying command “E6H40H” or “E7H40H” is determined, the “variation effect pattern B033” or “variation effect pattern B034” is changed to the special figure variation pattern specification command “E6H41H” or “E7H41H”. Is determined, the "fluctuation effect pattern B035" or the "fluctuation effect pattern B036" is determined.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect patterns B031” to “variation effect patterns B036”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed (“symbol variation B2-1” and “symbol variation B2-2”). Appearing special character reach ("Special character reach B4-1", "Special character reach B4-2", "Special character reach B5-1", "Special character reach B5-2", "Special character reach B6-1" , "Special character reach B6-2"), and a notification that the determination result of the big hit determination is a third big hit or a small hit is a variable effect.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variable effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In the fluctuating effect pattern determination table of the effect mode B, “variation effect pattern B001” to “fluctuating effect pattern B042” are executed (実 行), non-execution (“O”) of “development notice B” and “fixed effect B” as special effects. X) is associated with the information.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuating effect pattern B019” is associated with information indicating that “development notice B” is executed (○) and “decided effect B” is not executed (×).
When the “variable effect pattern B019” is determined in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process to be described later, the sub CPU 102a confirms that “development notice B” is to be executed as a special effect in step S1311-6. I do.

(Fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C)
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C in FIG. 42 is a variable effect of a variable effect performed after the number of special figure changes in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state is 31 to 74 times. It is a pattern.

  In the effect mode C, a variable effect pattern of a variable effect that is executed when a special jackpot is not won even when the number of special figure changes in the high-probability game state and the time saving game state is 1 to 30 times is provided. Therefore, a character that appears only in the production mode C as a variable production pattern having a reach production different from the “special character reach” in the production mode B in the special figure variation frequency of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Have a fluctuating effect pattern of “attack reach” in which the player makes an attack.

  As shown in the fluctuating effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C in FIG. 42, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, “E6H50H” or “E7H50H” is determined as the special figure fluctuating pattern designation command. , “Fluctuation effect pattern C001” or “fluctuation effect pattern C002” is determined.

  In the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C001” and the “variable effect pattern C002”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the variable effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol change C1-1”, “symbol change C1- 2)), a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  Further, when the special symbol determination result is “losing” and “E6H51H” or “E7H51H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C003” or “variation effect pattern C004” is determined. You. In addition, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, when “E6H52H” or “E7H52H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C005” or “variation effect pattern C006” is determined. You.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns C003” to “variable effect patterns C006” are displayed by changing a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol change C2-1”, “symbol change C2-2”, “symbol change C3-1”). , "Symbol variation C3-2"), and a variation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When the special symbol determination result is “losing”, and “E6H53H” or “E7H53H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C007” or “variation effect pattern C008” is determined.

  Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H54H” or “E7H54H” is determined, the “variation effect pattern C009” or “variation effect pattern C010” is changed to the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H55H” or “ When the “E7H55H” is determined, the “fluctuating effect pattern C011” or “variable effect pattern C012” is obtained, and when the special figure fluctuation pattern designating command “E6H56H” or “E7H56H” is determined, the “fluctuating effect pattern” is determined. If “C013” or “fluctuating effect pattern C014” is determined to be the special figure fluctuation pattern designating command “E6H57H” or “E7H57H”, “fluctuating effect pattern C015” or “fluctuating effect pattern C016” is changed to the special figure fluctuation. Pattern specification command "E6H58H Or when "E7H58H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern C017" or "variations demonstration pattern C018" is determined, respectively.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect pattern C007” to the “variable effect pattern C018” are a plurality of special effect symbols displayed in a variable manner (“symbol change C2-1”, “symbol change C2-2”, “symbol change C3-1”). , "Symbol variation C3-2"), and then attack reach ("attack reach C4-1", "attack reach C4-2", "attack reach C5-1", which is an effect of a predetermined character making an attack), “Attack reach C5-2”, “Attack reach C6-1”, “Attack reach C6-2”, “Attack reach C1-1”, “Attack reach C1-2”, “Attack reach C2-1”, “Attack Reach C2-2 "," Attack reach C3-1 ", and" Attack reach C3-2 "), and this is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If the special symbol determination result is the first big hit and “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C019” or “variation effect pattern C020” is determined. You.

  Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” is determined, the “variation effect pattern C021” or “variation effect pattern C022” is changed to the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH”. Is determined, the "variable effect pattern C023" or the "variable effect pattern C024" is determined.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect patterns C019” to “variation effect patterns C024”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed (“symbol variation C3-1”, “symbol variation C3-2”), and thereafter, a predetermined character Attack reach (attack reach C1-1), "attack reach C1-2", "attack reach C2-1", "attack reach C2-2", "attack reach C3-1", "Attack reach C3-2"), and a fluctuation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variable effect as when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed is different.

  If the special symbol determination result is the third big hit and “E6H5FH” or “E7H5FH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C031” or “variation effect pattern C032” is determined. You.

  Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H60H” or “E7H60H” is determined, the “variation effect pattern C033” or “variation effect pattern C034” is changed to the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H61H” or “E7H61H”. Is determined, the "fluctuation effect pattern C035" or the "fluctuation effect pattern C036" is determined.

  In the variation effects of “variation effect patterns C031” to “variation effect patterns C036”, a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”), and thereafter, a predetermined character Attack attack ("attack reach C4-1", "attack C4-2", "attack reach C5-1", "attack reach C5-2", "attack reach C6-1", "attack reach C4-1" Attack Reach C6-2 ") is performed to notify that the big hit determination result is the third big hit or small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, a variable effect similar to the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed is different.

In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode C, “variation effect pattern C001” to “variation effect pattern C042” are executed (特別) or non-execution of “development notice C” and “fixed effect C” as special effects. Information indicating (x) is associated with the information.
For example, the special symbol determination result “variable effect pattern C019” is associated with information indicating that “development notice C” and “fixed effect C” are executed (（).
When determining the “variable effect pattern C019” in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process to be described later, the sub CPU 102a determines, in step S1311-6, “development notice C” and “fixed effect C” as special effects. Confirm that you want to execute.

(Variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode D)
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D in FIG. 43 is a variable effect of a variable effect performed after 75 to 84 times the number of special figure changes in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. It is a pattern.

  In this effect mode D, there is a variable effect pattern of a variable effect that is executed when a special jackpot is not won even when the special figure changes 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, as a variable effect pattern having a reach effect different from the “attack reach” of the effect mode C in the special figure fluctuation frequency of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, it appears only in the effect mode D, The character performing the Janken has a variable effect pattern of “Janken effect” in which the character performing the Janken and the opponent of the Janken perform the predetermined number of times. By such a fluctuation effect of the Janken effect, the player is given a sense of expectation that the player wants to win a jackpot in a state where the number of special figure changes in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state is small.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D in FIG. 43, when the special symbol determination result is “losing”, “E6H70H” or “E7H70H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command. In the case where any one of “variable effect pattern D001” to “variable effect pattern D003” is determined and “E6H71H” or “E7H71H” is determined, “variable effect pattern D004” to “variable effect pattern If any one of "Pattern D006" is determined and "E6H72H" or "E7H72H" is determined, one of "Variable effect pattern D007" to "Variable effect pattern D009" is determined.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns D001” to “variable effect pattern D009” include “symbol changes” (“symbol changes D1-1” to “symbol changes D1-3”, “symbol changes D1-3” and “symbol changes”) that change and display a plurality of special effect symbols. The two characters are notified during the “change D2-1” to “symbol change D2-3” and “symbol change D3-1” to “symbol change D3-3”) by informing “Janken win once!”. This is a variable effect in which the (friend character, opponent character) performs a one-time jump, performs an effect that the ally character loses, and informs that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In a case where the special symbol determination result is a loss, if “E6H73H” or “E7H73H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, any one of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D012” Is determined, and the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H74H” or “E7H74H” is determined, one of “variation effect pattern D013” to “variation effect pattern D015” is determined, and the special figure variation When the pattern designation command “E6H75H” or “E7H75H” is determined, one of “fluctuation effect pattern D016” to “fluctuation effect pattern D018” is decided.

  The fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern D010” to the “variation effect pattern D018” is a fluctuation effect in which “Janken Reach” is executed after “symbol fluctuation” to notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D010” to “variable effect patterns D012” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D1-1” to “symbol change D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win twice!" And the two characters (the ally character and the opponent character) perform the first round of janken and the ally character wins, and then the "janken reach" ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to (Janken Reach D1-3) in the second round of the game in which the ally character loses in the second game, and a notification that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss It is a production.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D013” to “variable effect patterns D015” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D2-1” to “symbol change D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win three times!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( (Janken Reach D2-1)-(Janken Reach D2-3)), the effect that the ally character wins in the second round of janken and loses the ally character in the third round of janken, and determines the big hit Is a fluctuation effect for notifying that the determination result is a loss.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D016” to “variable effect patterns D018” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D3-1” to “symbol change D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken 4th win!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( In the “Janken Reach D3-1” to “Janken Reach D3-3”), the effect is that the ally character wins in the second and third rounds of janken and the ally character loses in the fourth round of janken reach. This is a variable effect that notifies that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D019” to “variable effect patterns D021” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D1-1” to “symbol change D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , "Let's win Janken twice!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to (Janken Reach D1-3)) a change in which the ally character wins even in the second round of Janken and informs that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is a production.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns D022” to “variable effect pattern D024” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D2-1” to “symbol change D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win three times!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( “Janken Reach D2-1” to “Janken Reach D2-3”) perform an effect in which allied characters win consecutively in the second and third rounds of Janken, and the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It is a fluctuating effect that informs you that there is something.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D025” to “variable effect patterns D027” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D3-1” to “symbol change D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win four times!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( “Janken Reach D3-1” to “Janken Reach D3-3”), the effect that the ally character wins consecutively in the second to fourth round of Janken is performed, and the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is a fluctuating production that informs the user.

  When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variable effect as when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol stopped and displayed is different.

  When "E6H7CH" or "E7H7CH" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, one of "variation effect pattern D037" to "variation effect pattern D039" If any of them is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H7DH” or “E7H7DH” is determined, one of “variation effect pattern D040” to “variation effect pattern D042” is determined, and When the variation pattern designation command “E6H7EH” or “E7H7EH” is determined, one of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” is determined.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D037” to “variable effect patterns D039” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D1-1” to “symbol change D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win twice!" And the two characters (the ally character and the opponent character) perform the first round of janken and the ally character wins, and then the "janken reach" ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to (Janken Reach D1-3) perform the effect that the character of the ally and the character of the opponent become "Aiko" in the second match of the second match, and determine the jackpot determination. This is a variable effect informing that the result is the third big hit or small hit.

  The variable effects of the “variable effect patterns D040” to “variable effect pattern D042” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D2-1” to “symbol change D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win three times!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken, and the ally character wins, and then "Janken Reach" ( In the “Janken Reach D2-1” to “Janken Reach D2-3”), the ally character wins in the second round of Janken, and the ally character and the opponent character become “Aiko” in the third round of Janken. This is a variable effect in which the effect of “No.” is performed, and the determination result of the big hit determination is a third big hit or a small hit.

  The variable effects of “variable effect patterns D043” to “variable effect patterns D045” are performed during “symbol change” (“symbol change D3-1” to “symbol change D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are changed and displayed. , "Janken will win four times!" And the two characters (friend character and opponent character) perform the first match of Janken and the ally character wins, and then "Janken reach" ( ("Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3")), the ally character wins continuously in the second and third round of Janken, and the ally character and the opponent character in the fourth round of Janken. This is a variable effect in which an effect is produced in which “is aiko” and the result of the big hit determination is a third big hit or a small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variable effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

“Variation effect pattern D001” to “Variation effect pattern D054” are associated with information indicating the execution (〇) of “development notice D”, “character notice D”, and “decided effect D” as special effects. I have.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuating effect pattern D019” is associated with information indicating execution of “development notice D” (○) and execution of “fixed effect D” (○).
If the “variable effect pattern D019” is determined in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process to be described later, the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1311-6 that the special effect includes “development notice D” and “character notice D”. It is confirmed that "decision effect D" is to be executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 43, in the special game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game, the effect mode B in which the number of times the special symbol is changed is 1 to 30 is executed. The fluctuation effect in the effect mode C in which the number of fluctuations is 31 to 74 times is higher than the fluctuation effect in the special effect, and the fluctuation number is 35 to 84 times more than the fluctuation effect in the effect mode C. The execution effect of the special effect is higher in the variable effect of the effect mode D executed at the time.

(Type of each special production)
FIGS. 44 and 45 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of “effect mode A”. FIG. 44 (a) is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 44 (b) shows a special result for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode A when the result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, the execution ratios (%) of “line notice A1” to “line notice A5” as “line notice A” are set, and “character announcement A” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” is set, and the execution ratio (%) of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” as “development notice A” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “determined effect A1” and “determined effect A2” as “determined effect A” is set.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a special effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode A. FIG. 45 (a) is a diagram showing a “line announcement A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “line announcement A” in effect mode A. FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram illustrating a “character notice A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “character notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. 45 (c) is a diagram showing a “development notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 45D is a diagram illustrating a “determined effect A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect A” in the effect mode A.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 45 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b). Is determined by lottery based on the execution ratios shown in the table.

"Serif notice A1" is for displaying an effect image of "serif a1" such as "Getting rich!" On the image display device 14. FIG. This "dialogue notice A1", which first performance button 18A is selected as an operation means operated in the operation lifetime is valid, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime X ₁₁ will be described _later), the first The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state. Then, based on the fact that one press operation is performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period, a later-described “character a1” will say “get rich!” As “line a1”. The effect image of the content (see (a-1-3) in FIG. 53) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is moved from the "standby position 3" to the "operating position 3" as a movable member. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  "Serif notice A2" displays the effect image of "serif a2" of "Have a hundred cars?" On the image display device 14, and the effect contents are the same as "serif notice A1" except that the movable member is not operated. is there.

  "Serif notice A3" displays an effect image of "serif a3" of "Are you getting ten cars?" On the image display device 14, and the effect contents are the same as "serif notice A1" except that the movable member is not operated. is there.

  "Serif notice A4" does not set the operation validity period, and displays the effect image of "serif a4", "Which one is acquired?" On the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, and does not operate the movable member. Is the same as "Serial notice A1" in the effect contents.

  "Serif notice A5" is for displaying an effect image of "Serif a5" of "Will you get money?" On the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and does not operate the movable member. Is the same as "Serial notice A1" in the effect contents.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in the “serif notice A”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “serif notice A1” to “serif notice A5” is the highest in the “serif notice A1”. The execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” is set in “Serif notice A” so as to be lower as “Serif notice A2” to “Serif notice A5”.

“Character notice A1” is for displaying an effect image of “character a2-1” on the image display device 14. This "character announcement A1", the first performance button 18A as an operation means for operating the operating lifetime is valid are those that are selected, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime Y ₁₁ described _later), the operation promoting The notification is not executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “character a2-1” described later (see (a-2-3) in FIG. 53). ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  “Character notice A2” is the same as “Character a2-1” except that the effect image of “Character a2-2” (see (b-2-3) in FIG. 54) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-1”. The effect content is the same as the character notice A1.

  “Character notice A3” is the same as “Character a2-1” except that the effect image of “Character a2-3” (see (c-2-3) in FIG. 55) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-1”. The effect content is the same as the character notice A1.

  “Character notice A4” does not set the operation validity period, and at a predetermined timing, instead of “character a2-1”, the effect image of “character notice a2-4” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as the “character notice A1”.

  “Character notice A5” does not set the operation validity period, and at a predetermined timing, renders an effect image of “character notice a2-5” (not shown) instead of “character a2-1” on the image display device 14. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as the “character notice A1”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44A and 44B, in “Character notice A”, “Character notice A1” has the highest degree of expectation (reliability) with respect to the jackpot of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5”. The execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” is set so as to be lower as “character notice A2” to “character notice A5”.

The “advance notice A1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect a1” on the image display device 14. In this “development notice A1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. In the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X ₁₂ described later), the first effect button 18A is selected. The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, the effect image of the “effect a1” (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 53) is displayed as an image based on a single pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period. In addition to displaying on the device 14, a corresponding effect such as moving the second decorative member 17B as the movable member from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2" is executed.

  “Development notice A2” is the same as “development notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) is displayed on image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”.

  "Development notice A3" is an effect image of "effect a3" (not shown) displayed on the image display device 14 in place of "effect a1" and produced as "advance notice A1" except that the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

  The effect of the “advance notice A4” is the same as that of the “advance notice A1” except that the first effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period.

  The “advance notice A5” displays the effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 in place of the “effect a1” in the non-projecting state of the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period, Except that the movable member is not operated, the effect is the same as that of the “advance notice A1”.

  The “advance notice A6” displays the effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) on the image display device 14 in place of the “effect a1” in a state where the first effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period, Except that the movable member is not operated, the effect is the same as that of the “advance notice A1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 44A and 44B, in the “expansion notice A”, the “expansion notice A1” has the highest expectation (reliability) with respect to the jackpot of “the development notice A1” to “the development notice A6”. The execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” are set so as to become lower as “development notice A2” to “development notice A6”.
In addition, in the tables of FIGS. 44A and 44B, in the variable effect that evolves from “super reach” to “special reach”, the first effect button 18A is in a protruding state at a high rate during the operation validity period. In the variable production that does not evolve from “super reach” to “special reach”, the execution of “expansion announcement A1” to “expansion announcement A6” is performed so that the first effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state at a high rate during the operation valid period. The percentage is set.

“Determined effect A1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display an effect image of “flash a1” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 54). ). This "decided effect A1", the operation as an operation means valid period operation becomes effective are those first performance button 18A is selected, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime X ₂₂ will be described _later), the first The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, an effect image of “flash a1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved. A corresponding effect such as moving from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “determined effect A2”, the effect image of “flash a2” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and the first decorative member 17A is set as the movable member at the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the “determined effect A”, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the “determined effect A1” and the “determined effect A2” to the jackpot is “decided” than the “determined effect A2”. The execution ratio of “determined effect A1” and “determined effect A2” is set such that the effect “effect A1” is higher. In other words, the "determined effect A1" is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a hit (first to third large hits, small hits) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is lost. You.

FIGS. 46 and 47 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of “effect mode B”. FIG. 46A is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each of the variable effect patterns in the effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 46 (b) shows a special result for each variable effect pattern in the effect mode B when the result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the execution ratios (%) of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” as “development notice B” are set. The execution ratio (%) of “determined effect B1” and “determined effect B2” is set.

  FIG. 47 is a view showing a special effect information table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and storing setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B. FIG. 47A is a diagram illustrating a “development notice B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice B” in the effect mode B. FIG. 47B is a diagram illustrating a “determined effect B information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect B” in the effect mode B.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 47 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). Is determined by lottery based on the execution ratios shown in the table.

The “advance notice B1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect b1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice B1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X ₄₁ described later) for validating the operation of the first effect button 18A is set, and during the operation effective period, the operation of the first effect button 18A is set. The prompting operation prompting is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, an effect image of the “effect b1” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 58) is displayed as an image. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the device 14 is executed.

  In the “advance notice B2”, during the operation valid period, the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the non-projecting state, and the effect image of “effect b2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 in place of “effect b1”. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as the “advance notice B1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the “development notice B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is “development notice B1” and “development notice B1”. The execution ratios of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” are set to be higher than “B2”.
In addition, in the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, in the variation effect that evolves from “symbol variation” to “special character reach”, the first effect button 18A is in a protruding state at a high rate during the operation validity period. In a variable effect that does not develop from “symbol change” to “special character reach,” the “expansion notice B1” and “development notice B2” such that the first effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state at a high rate during the operation validity period. Is set.

"Determined effect B1" is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of "flash b1" on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-3) in FIG. 59). ). This "decided effect B1", which first performance button 18A is selected as an operation means operated in the operation lifetime is valid, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime X ₅₂ will be described _later), the first The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on the fact that one press operation is performed for the operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member is displayed. A corresponding effect such as moving 17A from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “decision effect B2”, the effect image of “flash b2” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and the first decorative member 17A is moved as the movable member to the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the “decision effect B”, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the “decision effect B1” and the “decision effect B2” is larger than the “decision effect B2”. The execution ratio of “determined effect B1” and “determined effect B2” is set so that “effect B1” is higher. In other words, the "determined effect B1" is determined at a higher ratio when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a hit (first to third large hits, small hits) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is lost. You.

FIGS. 48 and 49 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of “effect mode C”. FIG. 48 (a) is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern in the effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 48 (b) shows a special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode C when the result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the execution ratios (%) of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” as “development notice C” are set. The execution ratio (%) of “determined effect C1” and “determined effect C2” is set.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a special effect information table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and storing setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode C. FIG. 49A is a diagram illustrating a “development notice C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “development notice C” in the effect mode C. FIG. 49B is a diagram illustrating a “determined effect C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect C” in the effect mode C.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 42, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 49 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and (b). Is determined by lottery based on the execution ratios shown in the table.

The “advance notice C1” is for displaying an effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 62) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice C1”, an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X ₇₁ described later) for validating the operation of the first effect button 18A is set, and the operation of the first effect button 18A is performed during the operation valid period. The prompting operation prompting is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single press operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect c1” on the image display device 14 is executed. I do.

  In the “advance notice C2”, during the operation valid period, the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the non-projecting state, and the effect image of “effect c2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 in place of “effect c1”. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as the “advance notice C1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and (b), in the “development notice C”, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” is “development notice C1” and “development notice C1”. The execution ratios of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” are set to be higher than “C2”.
In addition, in the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in the variation effect that evolves from “symbol variation” to “attack reach”, the first effect button 18A is protruded at a high rate during the operation effective period, and “ In the fluctuation effect that does not develop from "pattern fluctuation" to "attack reach", the execution of "development notice C1" and "development notice C2" is performed so that the first effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state at a high rate during the operation valid period. The percentage is set.

The “determined effect C1” is to move the first decorative member 17A of the movable member and display the effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 (see FIG. 62 (g-3-3)). In the “determined effect C1”, the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which an operation is valid during the operation valid period, and an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X ₇₂ described later) is set. During the operation validity period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the first effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved. A corresponding effect such as moving from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “determination effect C2”, an effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and the first decorative member 17A is moved as the movable member to the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), in the “determined effect C”, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the “determined effect C1” and the “determined effect C2” to the jackpot is “decided” than the “determined effect C2”. The execution ratio of “determined effect C1” and “determined effect C2” is set such that the effect C1 is higher. That is, the "determined effect C1" is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a hit (first to third large hits, small hits) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is a loss. You.

FIGS. 50 and 51 are tables which are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of “effect mode D”. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram illustrating a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 50 (b) shows a special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode D when the result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the execution ratios (%) of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” as “development notice D” are set, and are set as “decision effects D”. The execution ratio (%) of “determined effect D1” and “determined effect D2” is set.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub-ROM 102b and storing setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D. FIG. 51A is a diagram illustrating a “development notice D information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “development notice D” in the effect mode D. FIG. 51B is a diagram illustrating a “determined effect D information table” that stores the setting content for each type of “determined effect D” in the effect mode D.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 43, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the types of the special effects set in the table in FIG. 51 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b). Is determined by lottery based on the execution ratios shown in the table.

The “development notice D1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 65) on the image display device 14. In this “development notice D1”, an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X ₁₀₁ described later) for validating the operation of the first effect button 18A is set, and during the operation valid period, the operation of the first effect button 18A is set. The prompting operation prompting is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single press operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect d1” on the image display device 14 is executed. I do.

  In the “advance notice D2”, during the operation effective period, the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the non-projecting state, and the effect image of “effect d2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 in place of “effect d1”. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as the “advance notice D1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is “development notice D1” and “development notice D1”. The execution ratios of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” are set to be higher than “D2”.
In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the first effect button 18A is in a protruding state at a high rate during the operation validity period in the fluctuation effect that evolves from “symbol fluctuation” to “Janken reach”. In the fluctuation effect that does not develop from "design fluctuation" to "Janken reach", the execution of "development notice D1" and "development notice D2" such that the first effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state at a high rate during the operation validity period. The percentage is set.

“Character notice D1” is for displaying the effect image of “character d1” on the image display device 14. This "character announcement D1", the first performance button 18A as an operation means for operating the operating lifetime is valid are those that are selected, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime Y ₁₀₁ will be described _later), the operation promoting The notification is not executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “character d1” described later (see (j-4-2) in FIG. 65). A corresponding effect such as displaying on the image display device 14 is executed.

  “Character notice D2” is the same as “character notice D1” except that an effect image of “character d2” (not shown) is displayed on image display device 14 instead of “character d1”.

  "Character notice D3" is the same as "character notice D1" except that an effect image of "character d3" (not shown) is displayed on image display device 14 instead of "character d1".

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is the highest in “character notice D1”. The execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is set so as to be lower as “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.

"Determined effect D1" is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of "flash d1" on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-4) in FIG. 65). ). This "decided effect D1", the first performance button 18A as an operation means for operating the operating lifetime is valid are those that are selected, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime X ₁₀₂ which will be described _later), the first The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the state of the first effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on a single pressing operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash d1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved. A corresponding effect such as moving from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect D2” displays the effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and sets the first decorative member 17A as the movable member to the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “determined effect D”, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the “determined effect D1” and the “determined effect D2” to the jackpot is “decided” than the “determined effect D2”. The execution ratio of “determined effect D1” and “determined effect D2” is set so that “effect D1” is higher. In other words, the "determined effect D1" is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a hit (first to third large hits, small hits) than when the determination result of the big hit determination is a loss. You.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in “determined effect D”, “determined effect D1” and “determined effect D1” are performed such that “determined effect D1” is executed at a higher ratio than “determined effect D2”. D2 "is set.

  As a special effect in the figure fluctuation effect, the sub CPU 102a operates the operation means (the first effect button 18A or the second effect) during an operation effective period in which the operation on the operation means (the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A) is valid. The corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the button 19A).

  The sub CPU 102a has a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the later period (first period) in the specific gaming state. In the second period after the period (1), the operation valid period is set during the fluctuation effect.

  That is, the operation validity period is set during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (31st to 74th fluctuation) in the effect mode C than in the fluctuation effect in the production mode B (1st to 30th fluctuation). In addition, the operation validity period is set during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (the 75th to 84th fluctuation) in the effect mode D than in the fluctuation effect in the effect mode C.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a has a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the later period ( In a second period after the first period), an operation valid period is set in which the first effect button 18A as the operation means for validating the operation is set to the second state, that is, the protruding state.

(Variable effect pattern determination processing by the effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 35, a description will be given of a variable effect pattern determination process performed by the effect control board 102.
In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and thereby sets the current effect mode setting process (see FIG. 36) described later to set the current effect mode flag. The effect mode is confirmed, and a variable effect pattern determination table associated with the current effect mode is selected.

  In this step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and when confirming that the current effect mode is "effect mode A", , A variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A shown in FIG. 40 is selected.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode B" , A variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B shown in FIG. 41 is selected.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode C" , A variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C shown in FIG. 42 is selected.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode D" , A variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D shown in FIG. 43 is selected.

  Alternatively, in this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode E" , A variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode E (not shown) is selected.

  In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a checks the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of variation effect patterns are stored in association with the variation effect pattern determination values for each special figure variation pattern designation command in each effect mode. The variable effect pattern is identification information indicating the effect content of the variable effect, and is associated with a specific effect mode of the variable effect.

  The variable effect pattern is associated with the components of the variable effect such as the time of the variable effect, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. In the variable effect pattern of the variable effect on the image display device 14, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the display mode of the object image and the background image composed of characters and the like are also included as components of the variable effect. Corresponding.

  In step S1311-3, the sub CPU 102a obtains a random number for determining a variation effect pattern. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for fluctuation effect pattern determination in the random number storage area for fluctuation effect pattern determination of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311-4, the sub CPU 102a compares the variation effect pattern determination random number stored in the variation effect pattern determination random number storage area in step S1313-4 with the selected variation effect pattern determination table, thereby obtaining the variation effect pattern. Is determined.

  In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the special effect associated with the variable effect of the variable effect pattern determined in step S1313-4 is execution (〇) or non-execution (×) (see FIGS. 40 to 40). By referring to FIG. 43), it is determined whether or not to execute a special effect in the variable effect of the determined variable effect pattern. If the special effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1311-6. If the sub CPU 102a determines not to execute the special effect, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1311-9.

  In step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a checks the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4. For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines the “fluctuation effect pattern A034” in step S1311-4, in this step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a executes “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, and “development notice A” as special effects. Then, it is confirmed that the “determined effect A” is not executed (see FIG. 40).

In step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining by lottery the type of the special effect confirmed in step S1311-6.
In step S1311-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the processing for determining the type of the special effect in step S1311-7 has been completed for all of the special effects confirmed in step S1311-6, and determines that the process has been completed. If so, the process moves to step S1311-9. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S1311-7.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines the “fluctuating effect pattern A034” in step S1311-4, in step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a calculates the execution ratio according to the special effect type determination table in the effect mode A in FIG. Any one of "Serif notice A1" to "Serif notice A5" is determined as the type of "Serif notice A", and any of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" is determined as the type of "Character notice A" Then, one of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is determined as the type of “development notice A”.

  In step S1311-9, the sub CPU 102a causes the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4 to include information on the special effect of the type determined in step S1311-7, and controls the variable effect control. The command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311-10, the sub CPU 102a stores the variable effect data corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect time of the variable effect in the variable effect timer counter. . The variable effect timer counter is subjected to “4” addition processing in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the variable effect at the present time by using the variable effect timer counter.

  Note that the fluctuation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When receiving the variable effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern indicated by the command, and outputs the sound of the variable effect to an audio output device. 15 is performed. Further, upon receiving the variable effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs the operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and the illumination control of the effect lighting device 16 in the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern indicated by the command.

  Further, the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the special effect at the execution timing of the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern indicated by the variable effect control command received from the effect control board 102. The control and the control for outputting the sound of the special effect from the sound output device 15 are performed. Further, when receiving the variable effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs the operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and the lighting control of the effect lighting device 16 in the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern indicated by the command. Do.

(Production mode setting processing by the production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect designating command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-2, confirms whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. . The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1314-3 when confirming that there is a loss, and moves the process to step S1314-7 when confirming that there is no loss.

In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a confirms the result of the special symbol determination based on the information of the special effect symbol designating command confirmed in step S1314-1. Then, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 39) stored in the sub ROM 102b, and compares the confirmed result of the special symbol determination with the effect mode determination table to determine the effect mode.
If the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the first big hit or the second big hit, as shown in FIG. 39, the “effect mode B” is determined. As a result, after the first big hit game ends or the second big hit game ends, the “effect mode B” is set.
When the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the third big hit or the small hit, the "effect mode E" is determined as shown in FIG. As a result, after the end of the third big hit game or the end of the small hit game, the “effect mode E” is set.

  In step S <b> 134-8, the sub CPU 102 a stores the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S <b> 1314-7 in the effect mode flag storage area, and the effect mode executable number of times associated with the effect mode. (Ma) is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process ends.

  The effect mode executable number of times refers to the number of variable effects that can be executed in the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of variable effects (M: effect mode remaining number) that can be executed in a specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set.

When the “effect mode B” is determined in the above-described step S1314-7, the “effect mode B” is set after the end of the first big hit game or the end of the second big hit game, and the effect mode execution number ( Ma) is stored 30 times.
In addition, when the “effect mode E” is determined in the above-described step S1314-7, the “effect mode E” is set after the end of the third big hit game or the end of the small hit game, and the effect mode executable number of times is set. 84 times are stored as (Ma).

  On the other hand, in step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A is currently set, that is, whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives the initialization designation command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the initialization processing of step S10 in the main processing of the main control board, the sub CPU 102a sets the production mode flag “00H” to the production mode of the sub RAM 102c. The effect mode A is set by storing in the flag area.

  In step S1314-3, when the sub CPU 102a determines that the mode is the effect mode A, the effect mode setting process ends. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102a determines that the mode is not the effect mode A, in step S1314-4, the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is decremented by "1" to update the remaining number (M) of the effect mode. At -5, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is "0".

  In this step S1314-5, when the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter of the effect number of remaining times (M) is not “0”, the effect mode setting process ends, and the counter value becomes “0”. If it is determined that “0” is present, in step S1314-6, the effect mode flag of the “destination effect mode” shown in FIG. 39 is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (set of the effect device mode), and the effect mode setting process is performed. To end.

  For example, the sub CPU 102a is in a state where the effect mode is set to the effect mode B in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game or the second big hit game, and M = 0 in step S1314-5. If it is determined that there is any (YES in S1314-5), in step S1314-6, the effect mode C is set as the effect mode after the effect mode B (transition destination effect mode).

  When the sub-CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 in the state where the effect mode C is set (YES in step S1345-5), the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1314-6 that the effect mode C An effect mode D is set as a later effect mode (migration destination effect mode).

  In addition, when the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 while the effect mode is set to the effect mode D (YES in S1314-5), the effect of the effect mode D is determined in step S1314-6. An effect mode A is set as a subsequent effect mode (migration destination effect mode).

In the present embodiment, as shown in the effect mode determination table in FIG. 39, the effect mode A is set in the low-probability game state and the non-time saving game state.
In addition, in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won, if the number of special figure changes is 1 to 30 times The effect mode B is set, and the effect mode C is set if the number of special figure changes is 31 to 74 times, and the effect mode D is set if the number of special figure changes is 75 to 84 times.
In addition, if the number of special figure changes after the third big hit game or the small hit game when the third big hit or the small hit is won is 1 to 84 times, the effect mode E is set.

  The sub CPU 102a determines a variable effect pattern based on the variable effect pattern determination table corresponding to the effect mode set as described above.

  The sub CPU 102a executes a special effect (“serif notice”, “character notice”, “development notice”, “fixed effect”) among the variable effect patterns shown in the variable effect pattern determination tables of FIGS. The variable effect pattern associated with the information of (〇) is determined, and as the type of the special effect associated with the determined variable effect pattern, the operation validity period shown in FIGS. 45, 47, 49, and 51 When the type of the special effect associated with is determined, the operation validity period is set in the variable effect.

  As can be seen from the execution ratios of the special effects (the ratios of circles) in FIGS. 40 to 43 and FIGS. 44, 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102a sets the “producing mode” in the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state. "A" is performed in the "producing mode B" to the "producing mode D" in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state at a rate higher than the rate at which the type of the special effect associated with the operation validity period to be executed is determined. The special effect type associated with the operation validity period is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the “producing mode” in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state at a higher rate than the rate of the operation valid period in the variable production in the “producing mode A” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. In the variable effects of “B” to “effect mode D”, the operation effective period is set.

  Then, as can be seen from the execution ratio (the ratio of the circle) of the special effects in FIGS. 41 to 43 and FIGS. 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102a executes the second big hit game after the end of the first big hit game. Of the “producing mode B” to the “producing mode D” in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the end of “producing mode B” and “producing mode C” As the effect mode "D", the type of the special effect associated with the operation validity period is determined at a higher rate as the type of the special effect executed in that mode. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode in which the number of special figure fluctuations is higher at a higher rate than the effect mode (first period) in which the number of special figure fluctuations is smaller among the “effect mode B” to “effect mode D”. In the (second period), the operation effective period is set during the fluctuation effect. Here, among the “production mode B” to “production mode D”, the higher the ratio becomes “production mode B”, “production mode C”, and “production mode D”, the higher the ratio of the special production executed in that mode. As the type, the type of the special effect associated with the operation effective period in which the operation means is in the protruding state (the second state) is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode in which the number of special figure fluctuations is higher at a higher rate than the effect mode (first period) in which the number of special figure fluctuations is smaller among the “effect mode B” to “effect mode D”. In the (second period), an operation effective period in which the operation means is in the protruding state (second state) during the fluctuation effect is set.

(Production input control processing by the production control board)
The effect input control processing by the effect control board 102 in step S1400 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a determines the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 based on the pressing operation of the first effect button 18A, and the second effect button operation based on the operation of the second effect button 19A. By determining whether or not any of the second effect button operation detection signals from the detection switch 19a has been input, it is determined whether or not any of these operation means has been operated.

  In this step S1401, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1402 when determining that an operation has been performed on any of the operation means, and proceeds to step S1402 when determining that no operation has been performed on any of the operation means. The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol is currently being changed and displayed, and if it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1403 to change the special symbol. If it is determined that it is not being displayed, the process moves to step S1407.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a confirms the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed according to the current variation display of the special symbol stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation is valid during the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern confirmed in step S1403, and if it is determined that the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S1405. Then, if it is determined that the operation is not in the validity period, the effect input control process ends.

In step S1405, during the operation validity period determined in step S1404, the sub CPU 102a performs a single-stroke (one-time operation) of a designation operation on the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means activated in this operation validity period. It is determined whether or not the first effect button operation detection signal is input from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11.
In this step S1405, the sub CPU 102a inputs the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 during the operation valid period, thereby performing the designation operation to the operation means whose operation is enabled. If it is determined that the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 has not been input, the process proceeds to step S1406. When it is determined that the designation operation on the means has not been performed, the effect input control processing ends.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, a corresponding effect control command for controlling a corresponding effect based on a designation operation to the operation means whose operation is enabled during the operation valid period. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing of step S1500. Then, when receiving the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform an effect control for executing a corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

  For example, in step S1403, when the sub CPU 102a confirms the “variable effect pattern A034” as the variable effect pattern and executes the “line notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a transmits the corresponding effect control command to the image control board 105 and The signal is transmitted to the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the image control board 105 performs control to display an effect image of “line a1” as the corresponding effect. In addition, the lamp control board 104 controls the drive to the third effect accessory device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operation” as the corresponding effect. The moving operation for moving to position 3 ”is performed.

  In this manner, the sub CPU 102a promotes the operation to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 18A in the game effect related to the game using the game ball, such as the variable effect performed during the variable display of the special symbol. During the operation effective period for performing the notification, the first effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (first state) or the projecting state (second state).

  In step S1407, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game is not in a game effect related to the game, and if it is determined that the game is in a game standby, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to a step S1408. If it is determined that it is not waiting, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1408, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation is in effect during the game standby mode, in which the operation of the first effect button 18A as the operation unit is valid, and determines that the operation is in effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1409, and if it is determined that the operation is not in the effective period, the effect input control process ends.

In step S1409, during the operation valid period determined in step S1408, the sub CPU 102a performs a single hit (1 in the operation valid period) which is a designation operation on the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means whose operation is enabled. Is determined.
In this step S1409, when the sub CPU 102a determines that a single hit, which is a designation operation on the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means whose operation is validated, is performed during the operation validity period determined in step S1408. In step S1410, the process proceeds to step S1410, and if it is determined that the single hit on the first effect button 18A has not been performed, the effect input control process ends.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display a menu screen that allows the player to select and determine various menus that can be set in the gaming machine based on the designation operation determined in step S1409. The menu screen control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The menu screen control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1500.
When receiving the menu screen control command, the image control board 105 performs control to display the menu screen based on the control content indicated by the menu screen control command.

  Further, the menu screen control command may be transmitted to the lamp control board 104 by the data output process of step S1500. In this case, when receiving the menu screen control command, the lamp control board 104 turns on the first effect button 18A whose operation is enabled when the menu screen is displayed based on the control content indicated by the menu screen control command. Therefore, the light emission control of the LED is performed.

  In step S1410, the sub CPU 102a sets a designation operation execution flag indicating that the designation operation has been performed in step S1409 to ON in the designation operation execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the designated execution flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid state in which the operation on the second effect button 19A as the second operation means is valid.

In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the designated operation execution flag in the designated operation execution flag storage area to ON when the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 14, and the menu screen is not displayed on the image display device 14. And off.
As described above, during the standby state in which the game effect is not being executed, the sub CPU 102a is configured such that the single operation of pressing the first effect button 19A sets the designated operation execution flag to ON. Then, an operation valid state for validating the operation for the second effect button 19A is set.

  In the present embodiment, an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 18A during the execution of the game effect related to the game using the game ball, such as the variable effect performed during the variable display of the special symbol. Is performed, the first effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state (first state) or a projecting state (second state).

  On the other hand, in the operation valid state during the standby state in which the game effect is not executed, the first effect button 18A is set to the non-projecting state (first state), and to the projecting state (second state). Is restricted.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a menu screen displayed on the image display device 14 based on the control based on the menu screen control command set in step S1409.

  The menu screen shown in FIG. 38 includes a character image 510 of “Please select a menu” and “volume setting” as a character image indicating a menu selectable by the upper part 191A and the lower part 193A of the second effect button 19A. A character image 511 indicating a menu, a character image 512 indicating a menu of “light amount setting”, a character image 513 indicating a menu of “guide”, and a character image 514 indicating a menu of “return”. An image 515A of the second effect button 19A to be used, a character image 515B of "selection", an image 516A of the first effect button 18A used to determine the selected menu, and a character image 516B of "determine" Have.

  As shown in FIG. 38, a character image 511 indicating a menu item "volume setting", a character image 512 indicating a menu item "light amount setting", a character image 513 indicating a menu item "guide", and a menu "return" The character images 514 indicating the items are displayed in this order from the upper side to the lower side of the menu screen.

  As described above, the menu screen of FIG. 38 is displayed on the image display device 14 by the pressing operation of the first effect button 18A. When the menu screen is displayed, the operation of the second effect button 19A is enabled. . Then, each time the upper part 191A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, the menu item displayed on the upper side of the menu screen is selected, and the lower part 193A of the second effect button 19A is pressed. Each time the menu item is displayed, the menu item displayed on the lower side of the menu screen is selected.

  The menu screen shown in FIG. 38 is in a state in which the menu item of “volume setting” is selected. In order to make the menu item selected in this way identifiable from other menu items, the menu item is selected. A character image indicating a menu item is blinked or an effect image is added to emphasize the character.

  Then, the selected menu item is determined by one pressing operation of the first effect button 18A, and thereafter, an image of the content of the determined menu item is displayed.

When “volume setting” is determined as a menu item, a volume setting screen (not shown) on which a volume gauge for displaying a volume for the player to adjust the volume output from the gaming machine Y is displayed.
When “light amount setting” is determined as a menu item, a light amount setting screen (not shown) is displayed, on which a volume gauge for displaying a volume gauge for a player to adjust the light amount of the LEDs in the effect lighting device 16 is displayed. .
When “Guide” is determined as the menu item, the explanation of the reach effect executed in the variable effects of the effect modes A to D, the description of the characters appearing in the variable effects of the effect modes A to D, the effect modes A to Various guide screens (not shown) for explaining the reliability of the jackpot in the “line announcement” and the “character announcement” executed in the fluctuation effect of D are displayed.
When “return” is determined as the menu item, the screen of the image display device 14 returns to the screen before displaying the menu screen.

  In addition, the state in which the volume setting screen is displayed on the image display device 14 when “volume setting” is determined as a menu item, and the case in which the light amount setting screen is displayed on the image display device 14 when “light amount setting” is determined. In the displayed state, the pressing of the left portion 192A and the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A can be performed.

  When the volume setting screen is displayed on the image display device 14, the volume can be adjusted by pressing the left portion 192A and the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A. Each time the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, the volume decreases, and the level of the volume gauge also decreases accordingly. Further, each time the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, the volume increases, and the level of the volume gauge increases accordingly.

  When the light amount setting screen is displayed on the image display device 14, the light amount can be adjusted by pressing the left portion 192A and the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A. Each time the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A is pressed down, the light amount of the LED in the effect lighting device 16 decreases, and accordingly, the level of the light amount gauge also decreases. Further, each time the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, the light amount of the LED in the effect lighting device 16 increases, and the level of the light amount gauge also increases accordingly.

  Note that the operation means (second operation means) that is enabled by a single press operation of the first effect button 18A during this standby state is not limited to the above-described second effect button 19A. Other operation means may be applied.

  For example, when the gaming machine Y is provided with an operation lever (not shown) that can be tilted to the near side, the back side, the left side, and the right side, the operation lever is applied instead of the second effect button 19A. . Specifically, for example, the tilting operation of the operation lever toward the back side corresponds to a pressing operation of the upper portion 191A of the second effect button 19A, and the tilting operation of the operation lever toward the front side of the lower portion 193A of the second effect button 19A. , The tilting operation of the operation lever to the left corresponds to the pressing operation of the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A, and the tilting operation of the operation lever to the right corresponds to the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A. Is equivalent to a pressing operation of. The upper portion 191A, the left portion 192A, the lower portion 193A, the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A and the back side, left side, front side, and right side of the operation lever do not need to correspond in this way. For example, the tilting operation of the operation lever toward the back side corresponds to a pressing operation of the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A, and the tilting operation of the operating lever toward the front side presses the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A. May be used.

  Further, the menu screen displayed on the image display device 14 is not limited to the example of FIG. 38 described above. For example, the “character selection” for allowing the player to select a character to appear during the production from among a plurality of characters. , A menu screen having menu items such as “select music” for allowing a player to select a music to be output during a jackpot game from a plurality of music.

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation effect will be described.
(Specific example of fluctuating production in production mode A)
First, a specific example of the variable effect of the variable effect pattern in the effect mode A will be described.

  FIG. 52 (a) shows the temporal flow of the fluctuation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A034”. FIG. FIG. 52 (b) shows the timing of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A038”. It is a figure for explaining a flow. FIG. 52 (c) shows the timing of the fluctuation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A042”. It is a figure for explaining a flow.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A034 (first big hit))
When a jackpot determination result in a low probability game state and non-time reduction gaming state "first big hit", "variation demonstration pattern A034" is selected, the sub CPU102a the timing T ₁₁ shown in FIG. 52 (a) the effect control for executing the fluctuation effect from the timing T ₁₄ from performing. FIG. 53 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 52 (a), and a first effect button 18A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

Sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 11} to time _{T 12} (a-1), in the period from the timing _{T 12} to time _{T 13} (a-2), "normal reach perform A1-1 ", then, in the period from the timing _{T 13} to time _{T 14} (a-3) and the period (a-4), conducts effect control for executing the" super reach A1-1 " .

  The sub CPU 102a performs an effect control for displaying an effect image in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 14 in “symbol change A1-1” in the period (a-1).

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in this period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a first determines that a plurality of special effect symbols fluctuate and a predetermined character “character a1 (Kunoichi)” appears in FIG. The effect control for displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-1) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”. “Serif notice A” is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the “line announcement A” in accordance with the execution ratio of “line announcement A” in the “variable stage pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. An effect control for executing any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" shown in the special effect information table is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes the first effect button 18A of the first effect button 18A as shown in FIG. 52 (a) when executing any of the "line announcement A1" to the "line announcement A3" in the "symbol variation A1-1". setting the operating lifetime _{X 11} to enable the operation (see FIG. 45 (a)).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 11} displays the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. 53, including an image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A on the image display device 14 Perform the production. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in the “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and X ₁₁ (1) of FIG. as shown in the operation lifetime X ₁₁ in "serif notice A1" - "speech announcement A3" is a state of the first performance button 18A, and remains non-protruding state (first state) (100% non-projecting State) and the projected state (second state) (0% projected state). In addition, when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A1", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11} is "character a1" is "words a1 53 (a-1-3) of FIG. 53 showing the appearance of ""("Getrich!") Is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is set as the movable member in "standby". A corresponding effect (preliminary effect) such as moving from “position 3” to “operation position 3” is executed. Note that the sub CPU 102a may execute an effect of outputting the sound of “line a1” from the sound output device 15.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), based on the operating lifetime _{X 11} 1 times pressing operation with respect to the first performance button 18A in is Therefore, unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53, the effect image in which “character a1” speaks “line a2” (“acquire one hundred cars?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14. An effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notification effect) to be displayed is performed.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), based on the operating lifetime _{X 11} 1 times pressing operation with respect to the first performance button 18A in is Therefore, unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53, an effect image in which “character a1” speaks “line a3” (“acquire ten cars?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14. An effect control for executing a corresponding effect (announcement effect) is performed.

On the other hand, sub-CPU102a is, "serif notice A4", if you want to run a "dialogue notice A5", it does not set the operation effective period _{X 11.} That is, in the “line notice A4” and the “line notice A5”, the image of the operation promotion notification such as the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. 53 is not displayed, and the “character” is displayed at a predetermined timing. a1 ”performs an announcement effect of displaying an effect image in which words are spoken on the image display device 14. Note that the announcement effects of "Serif notice A4" and "Serif notice A5" are effects corresponding to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “line notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a differs from the effect image shown in (a-1-3) in FIG. 53 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. Performs an announcement effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image of a state in which the user speaks “line a4” (“acquire one”?) On the image display device 14.

  When executing the “line notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a performs “character a1” at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 45A, differently from the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. Perform an announcement control (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image in which the user speaks “line a5” (“acquire money?”) On the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) on the image display device 14 in the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (a-2). An effect control for executing an effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect of (a-2-1) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect in “normal reach A1-1”. "Character notice A" is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, similarly to "line notice A".

  The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement A” as the “character announcement A” according to the execution ratio of the “character announcement A” in the “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any one of the character announcement A5 is performed.

When executing any of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A as shown in FIG. 52 (a). operation to set the validity period _{Y 11} (see FIG. 45 (b)).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{Y 11} does not perform the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A. That is, the sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{Y 11} performs control to display an effect image shown in FIGS. 53 without the image of the operation promoting notification (a-2-2) to the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a determines the execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” in the “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b) and Y ₁₁ (1) of FIG. as shown in the operation lifetime Y ₁₁ of "character notice A1" - "character notice A3" is a state of the first performance button 18A, and remains non-protruding state (first state) (100% non-projecting State) and the projected state (second state) (0% projected state).

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A1", based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11,} in FIG. 53 (a-2- As shown in 3), on the image display device 14, a new character “character a2-1” is additionally displayed in addition to the already displayed “character a1”. Effect control for executing the process.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), based on the fact that one of the pressing is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11} The image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (preliminary effect) such as additionally displaying “character a2-2” different from “character a2-1”.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), based on the fact that one of the pressing is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11} In the image display device 14, an effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as additionally displaying "character a2-3" different from "character a2-1" and "character a2-2". I do.

On the other hand, sub-CPU102a is, "Chara notice A4", if you want to run a "character notice A5", do not set the operation effective period _{Y 11.} That is, in the “character notice A4” and the “character notice A5”, a new character is added at a predetermined timing without displaying the operation promotion notification image as shown in (a-2-2) of FIG. An effect control for executing the displayed notice effect is performed. The announcement effects of "character announcement A4" and "character announcement A5" are effects equivalent to the above-described corresponding effects.

  When executing the “character notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which “character a2-4” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as illustrated in FIG. 45B. An effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  When executing the “character notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which the “character a2-5” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as illustrated in FIG. 45B. An effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (a-3) of the "super reach A1-1" and the "character a3 (child A)" is displayed. An effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the appearing reach effect on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in this period (a-3), the sub CPU 102a first stops the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and “character a3 (child A)”. Is performed on the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-3-1) of FIG.

  In the “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a, as a special effect, promotes the development to the “special reach A1-1” which is a production with a higher reliability for the jackpot than the “super reach A1-1”. Notice A "is executed. "Development notice A", like "Serif notice A" and "Character notice A", is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. is there.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A” as “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “expansion notice A6” is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in "super reach A1-1", in the case of performing any "development notice A1" - "Development notice A6" also operating lifetime _{X 12} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A Set (see FIG. 45 (c)).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 12,} as shown in FIG. 53, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (a-3-2) or (a-3-3) Is performed on the image display device 14. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge.

However, the (a-3-2) of the effect image is for display when the operation lifetime X ₁₂ are the first performance button 18A and a projecting state, the operation of the first performance button 18A of the projecting state It contains an image of the operation promotion notification to prompt.

On the other hand, effect image (a-3-3) it is intended to be displayed when the operation lifetime X ₁₂ are the first performance button 18A and a non-projecting state, the non-projecting state to the first performance button 18A It contains an image of operation promotion notification for prompting operation.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratios of the “advance notice A1” to “advance notice A6” in the “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and the X ₁₂ (1) of FIG. as shown, the operating lifetime X _12, the first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 50%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 50%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A1", during operation lifetime _{X 12,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 53 ( As shown in a-3-4), the second decorative member 17B as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and the second decorative member 17B is emphasized in the image display device 14. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a1) for performing the effect control is performed.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is being the first performance button 18A of the projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on this, the second decoration member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2”, and the effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decoration member 17B is displayed on the image display device 14. An effect control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying is performed.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is being the first performance button 18A of the projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on this, the image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A4", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on this, the second decoration member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2”, and the effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decoration member 17B on the image display device 14. Is performed for performing a corresponding effect (development notice).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice A5", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on the fact, the image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a2).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A6", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), 1 single pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projecting state during operation lifetime _{X 12} Based on the fact, the image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

In the period (a-4) of “Super Reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. With the same numerical value, control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image shown in (a-4) of FIG. 53 in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A022 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state and “fluctuating effect pattern A022” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing shown in FIG. A fluctuation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern A034” is executed. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 11} to time _{T 12} (a-1), in the period from the timing _{T 12} to time _{T 13} (a-2) " run the normal reach A1-1 "conducts effect control for executing effect period (a-3) of the" super reach A1-1 "from the timing _{T 13.}

  However, in the variable effect of “variable effect pattern A022”, the sub CPU 102a stops during the period (a-4) without the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols becoming the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol. An effect control for displaying the effect image of (A-1) in FIG. 53 is performed. This notifies the player that the jackpot determination result is "losing".

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A038 (first big hit))
When a jackpot determination result in a low probability game state and non-time reduction gaming state "first big hit", "variation demonstration pattern A038" is selected, the sub CPU102a the timing T ₂₁ to shown in FIG. 52 (b) the effect control for executing the fluctuation effect from the timing T ₂₄ from performing.

  FIG. 54 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 52 (b), a first effect button 18A, a first decorative member 17A, and a second decorative member 17B.

Sub CPU102 is the fluctuation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern A038" run "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 21} to time _{T 22} (b-1), from the timing _{T 22} to time _{T 23} in the period (b-2), executes the "normal reach A1-1", then the period from the timing _{T 23} to time _{T 24} (b-3) and in the period (b-4), "Special reach A1- The effect control for executing “1” is performed.

The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-1-1) corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-1) in the "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (b-1), The effect image of (b-1-2) corresponding to the effect image of a-1-2) is displayed. Then, the operation lifetime _{X 21,} as shown in _X 21 (1) of FIG. 54, the state of the first performance button 18A, while a and (100% non-projecting state) of the non-projecting state (first state) , So as not to be in the protruding state (second state) (0% protruding state).

The effect image of (b-1-3) in FIG. 54 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “line notice A2”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A2", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11} is "character a1" is "dialogue a2 54 (b-1-3) of FIG. 54 showing the effect image (“Hundred cars acquired?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14 to perform a corresponding effect (notification effect). .

The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-2-1) in FIG. 54 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) in FIG. 53 in the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2). After that, the effect image of (b-2-2) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-2) is displayed. Then, without performing the operation lifetime _{Y 21} in operation promotes notification, as shown in _Y 21 (1) of FIG. 54, the state of the first performance button 18A, and remains non-protruding state (first state) ( (100% non-projection state) and projection state (second state) (0% projection state).

The effect image shown in (b-2-3) of FIG. 54 is an image of the corresponding effect in “character notice A2”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A2", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11} is, the "character a2-2" Add A corresponding effect (notification effect) of displaying the effect image of (b-2-3) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the period (b-3) of the "special reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a firstly displays "Character b1 (Samurai)" along with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) on the image display device 14. )) Performs an effect control for displaying an effect image ((b-3-1) in FIG. 54) of a reach effect for capturing "character c1 (thief)".

In the case of executing “fixed effect 1” in “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), sets an operation effective period X in which the operation of the first effect button 18A is enabled. ₂₂ is set (see FIG. 45D).

Sub CPU102a is operated in lifetime _{X 22,} as shown in FIG. 54, an effect image shown in including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (b-3-2) an image display device An effect to be displayed on 14 is executed. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-2), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters of “press!” Together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge in the protruding state.

  Note that the image of the first effect button 18A on the image display device 14 does not need to indicate the state of the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period. For example, when the first effect button 18A is in the protruding state (second state) during the operation effective period, the image of the first effect button 18A on the image display device 14 indicates the non-protruding state (first state). Alternatively, when the first effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (first state) during the operation effective period, the image of the first effect button 18A on the image display device 14 indicates the projecting state (second state). There may be.

The sub CPU 102a determines the execution ratio of “determined effect A1” and “determined effect A2” in the “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and X ₂₂ (1) of FIG. as shown, in the operation lifetime _{X 22} in "decided effect A1", the state of the first performance button 18A, protruding state (second state) and (100% projecting state), the non-protruding state (first State) (0% non-projection state).

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A1", during operation lifetime _{X 22,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 54 ( As shown in b-3-3), the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” to a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. In addition to moving to the “operation position 1-2”, the image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash d1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A2", do not set the operation lifetime _{X 22.} That is, in the “determination effect A2”, the image of the operation promotion notification as shown in (b-3-2) of FIG. 53 is not displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is set to “ From the “standby position 1”, via the “operation position 1-1”, the image display device 14 is moved to the “operation position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. An effect control for executing a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying an effect image (flash d1) is performed.

  In addition, in the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in the “determined effect”. ).

In addition, in the variable effect performed when the result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “determined effect”. Only move them.
As described above, in the “determined effect” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the big hit determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned lower than the “operation position 1-1”. Since the player is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the result of the jackpot determination is that the first jackpot of 16R (round) is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the second jackpot game of 4R (round). It informs that the game has been won for the "first big hit" to play.

In the period (b-4) of the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. With the same numerical value, the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and FIG. 54 (b-4) in which “character b1” is capturing “character c1” An effect control for displaying the effect image shown on the image display device 14 is performed.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A026 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, and the “variation effect pattern A026” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing shown in FIG. A variable effect similar to the “variable effect pattern A038” is executed. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 21} to time _{T 22} (b-1), in the period from the timing _{T 22} to time _{T 23} (b-2) " run the normal reach A1-1 "conducts effect control for executing effect period (b-3) of the" Special reach A1-1 "from the timing _{T 23.}

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect A” as “determined effect A” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect A” in “variable effect pattern A026” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “determined effect A2” is performed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern A026”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether “specified effect A1” or “determined effect A2” of “special reach A1-1” is executed. Is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and stops the "character c1" from the "character b1". By displaying the effect image of (B-1) of No. 54, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A042 (first big hit))
When a jackpot determination result in a low probability game state and non-time reduction gaming state "first big hit", "variation demonstration pattern A042" is selected, the sub CPU102a the timing T ₃₁ shown in FIG. 52 (c) the effect control for executing the fluctuation effect from the timing T ₃₅ from performing. FIG. 55 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variable effect shown in FIG. 52 (c), a first effect button 18A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

Sub CPU102 is the fluctuation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern A042" run "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 31} to time _{T 32} (c-1), from the timing _{T 32} to time _{T 33} in the period of (c-2), executes the "normal reach A1-1", then executes the "super reach A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 33} to time _{T 34} (c-3), the timing T period from ₃₄ to the timing _{T 35} (c-4), carries out an effect control so as to execute a "special reach A1-1" in the period (c-5).

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1), the sub CPU 102a operates the (c-1-1) in FIG. 55 corresponding to the effect image in (a-1-1) in FIG. Is performed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Serial announcement A” in FIG. 45A according to the execution ratio of “Serif announcement A” in “Variable production pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" shown in the special effect information table is executed.

The sub CPU 102a, when executing any of the “line notice A1” to the “line notice A3” in the “symbol change A1-1”, as shown in FIG. setting the operating lifetime _{X 31} to enable the operation (see FIG. 45 (a)).

Sub CPU102a, in the operating lifetime _{X 31,} executes an effect to be displayed in Figure 55 including the image of the operation promoting notification to effect image (c-1-2) to the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “Variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and X ₃₁ (1) of FIG. as shown in the operation lifetime _{X 31} in "serif notice A1" - "speech announcement A3" is a state of the first performance button 18A in _X 31 (1) of FIG. 55, the non-protruding state (first state ) (100% non-projection state) and not in the projection state (second state) (0% projection state). In addition, when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15.

The effect image of (c-1-3) in FIG. 55 shows the image of the corresponding effect in “line notice A3”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A3", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 31} is "character a1" is "dialogue a3 55 (c-1-3) of FIG. 55 showing the effect image ("Cross-of-ten-acquisition?") Is displayed on the image display device 14 (a notice effect).

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2), the sub-CPU 102a first displays the effect image of (c-2-1) in FIG. 55 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) in FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect in “normal reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement A” as the “character announcement A” in accordance with the execution ratio of the “character announcement A” in the “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the character announcements A5 is executed.

When executing any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A as shown in FIG. 52 (c). operation to set the validity period _{Y 31} (see FIG. 45 (b)).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{Y 31} does not perform the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A. That is, the sub CPU102a, in the operating lifetime _{Y 31,} to execute an effect of displaying an effect image shown in FIGS. 55 without the image of the operation promoting notification (c-2-2) to the image display device 14.

As shown in FIG. 55, the sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” in the “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. in operation lifetime _{Y 31} notice A1 "-" character notice A3 ", as shown in _Y 31 (1) of FIG. 55, the state of the first performance button 18A, a non-protruding state (first state) It is left as it is (100% non-projection state) and is not brought into the projection state (second state) (0% projection state).

The effect image shown in (c-2-3) of FIG. 55 is an image of the corresponding effect in “character notice A3”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character notice A3", based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 31} is, the "character a2-3" Add A corresponding effect (notification effect) of displaying the effect image of (c-2-3) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an effect control for executing “development notice A” that promotes development to “special reach A1-1” in “super reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” in accordance with the execution rate of “development notice A” in “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “expansion notice A6” is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in "super reach A1-1", in the case of performing any "development notice A1" - "Development notice A6" also operating lifetime _{X 32} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A Set (see FIG. 45 (c)).

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 32,} as shown in FIG. 55, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (c-3-2) or (c-3-3) Is performed on the image display device 14. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge.

However, the (c-3-2) of the effect image is for display when the operation lifetime X ₃₂ are the first performance button 18A and a projecting state, the operation of the first performance button 18A of the projecting state It contains an image of the operation promotion notification to prompt.

On the other hand, effect image (c-3-3) it is intended to be displayed when the operation lifetime X ₃₂ are the first performance button 18A and a non-projected state, to the first performance button 18A of the non-protruding state It contains an image of operation promotion notification for prompting operation.

The sub-CPU 102a shows the execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in the “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B and X ₃₂ (1) of FIG. as described above, in the operation lifetime _{X 32,} the first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 90%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 10%.

(C-3-4) in FIG. 55 illustrates an example of the “advance notice A1”. Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A1", during operation lifetime _{X 32,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 55 ( As shown in c-3-4), the second decorative member 17B as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and the second decorative member 17B is emphasized on the image display device 14. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a1) for performing the effect control is performed.

  In the period (c-4) of the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a firstly displays “Character b1 (Samurai) with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) on the image display device 14. )) Performs an effect control for displaying an effect image ((c-4-1) in FIG. 55) of a reach effect for capturing "character c1 (thief)".

When the “special reach A1-1” executes the “determined effect 1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), operates the first effect button 18A to make the operation valid period X valid. ₃₃ (see FIG. 45 (d)).

Sub CPU102a, the operation in the effective period _{X 33,} as shown in FIG. 55, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (c-4-2) effect image shown in the image display device An effect control for executing the effect to be displayed on 14 is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "press!" Together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge in the protruding state.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of “determined effect A1” and “determined effect A2” in the “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b) and X ₃₃ (1) of FIG. as shown, in the operation lifetime _{X 33} in "effect A1 decide", the state of the first performance button 18A, protruding state (second state) and (100% projecting state), the non-protruding state (first State) (0% non-projection state).

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A1", during operation lifetime _{X 33,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 55 ( As shown in c-4-3), the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14 via the “operation position 1-1”. In addition to moving to the “operation position 1-2”, the image display device 14 performs an effect control for executing a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  In addition, in the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in the “determined effect”. ).

In addition, in the variable effect performed when the result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “determined effect”. Only move them.
As described above, in the “determined effect” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the big hit determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned lower than the “operation position 1-1”. Since the player is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the result of the jackpot determination is that the first jackpot of 16R (round) is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the second jackpot game of 4R (round). It informs that the game has been won for the "first big hit" to play.

In the period (c-5) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. With the same numerical value, the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and (c-) in FIG. 55 (c) in which “character b1” is capturing “character c1”. An effect control for displaying the effect image shown in 5) on the image display device 14 is performed.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern A030 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, and “variation effect pattern A030” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing shown in FIG. A variable effect similar to the “variable effect pattern A042” is executed. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation A1-1" in the period from the timing _{T 31} to time _{T 32} (c-1), in the period from the timing _{T 32} to time _{T 33} (c-2) " run the normal reach A1-1 ", run the" super reach A1-1 "from the timing _{T 33} until the timing _{T 34,} directing the period of (c-4) of the" Special reach A1-1 "from the timing _{T 34} Effect control for executing the process.

The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect A” as “determined effect A” according to the execution ratio of “determined effect A” in the “variable effect pattern A030” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “determined effect A2” is performed.
However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern A030”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to the other in any of the “determined effect A1” and the “determined effect A2”. Do not move to the position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and stops the "character c1" from the "character b1". An effect control for displaying the effect image of (C-1) 55 is performed. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  FIGS. 56A to 56C respectively show a part of the special effect type determination table of the variable effect pattern for the loss of the effect mode A in FIG. 44A and the big hit in the effect mode A in FIG. It is the figure which extracted and constituted a part of the special effect type determination table of the fluctuation effect pattern for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the "line announcement A" during the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern A034" for the "first big hit" and the "variable effect pattern A046" for the "second big hit", " The execution ratio of the line announcement A1 is the highest, and the execution ratio gradually decreases in the order of the line announcement A2 to the line announcement A5.
On the other hand, in the "serif notice A" during the fluctuation effect of the "variation effect pattern A022" for "losing" corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the "variation effect pattern A034" and the "variation effect pattern A046", the "line notice A1" The execution ratio is the lowest, and the execution ratio gradually increases in the order of “line announcement A2” to “line announcement A5”.

  Also, in FIG. 56, the “variation effect pattern A026” for “losing”, the “variation effect pattern A038” for “first jackpot”, and the “variation effect pattern A050” for “second jackpot” are shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the execution ratio of “line announcement A1” to “line announcement A5” is set.

  In addition, FIG. 56 also shows the “variation effect pattern A030” for “losing”, the “variation effect pattern A042” for “first big hit”, and the “variation effect pattern A054” for “second big hit”. As shown in (c), the execution ratio of “line announcement A1” to “line announcement A5” is set.

  That is, in the "line announcement A", the reliability of the jackpot is highest in the line announcement A1, and gradually decreases in the order of "line announcement A2" to "line announcement A5".

Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the "character announcement A" during the fluctuation effect of "variation effect pattern A034" for "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern A046" for "second jackpot" , The execution ratio of “character announcement A1” is the highest, and the execution ratio gradually decreases in the order of “character announcement A2” to “character announcement A5”.
On the other hand, in the "character announcement A" during the fluctuation production of the "variation production pattern A022" for "losing" corresponding to the fluctuation productions of the "variation production pattern A034" and "variation production pattern A046", the "character announcement A1" The execution ratio is the lowest and the execution ratio gradually increases in the order of “character notice A2” to “character notice A5”.

  Also, in FIG. 56, the “variation effect pattern A026” for “losing”, the “variation effect pattern A038” for “first jackpot”, and the “variation effect pattern A050” for “second jackpot” are shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” is set.

  In addition, FIG. 56 also shows the “variation effect pattern A030” for “losing”, the “variation effect pattern A042” for “first big hit”, and the “variation effect pattern A054” for “second big hit”. As shown in (c), the execution ratio of "character notice A1" to "character notice A5" is set.

  That is, in the “character announcement A”, the reliability of the jackpot is highest in the “character announcement A1”, and gradually decreases in the order of “character announcement A2” to “character announcement A5”.

  Then, as can be seen from the determination value (execution ratio) of the special symbol variation pattern of the first big hit of the stop symbol data "10H" and "20H" shown in the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. , The reliability of the jackpot is gradually increased in the order of “variation effect pattern A034”, “variation effect pattern A038”, and “variation effect pattern A042”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to (c), in each of "line announcement A" and "character announcement A", "variation effect pattern A034", "variation effect pattern A038", "variation effect pattern" The execution ratio of the highly reliable announcements ("line announcement A1", "line announcement A2") gradually increases in the order of "A042".

  Similarly, as can be seen from the determination value (execution ratio) of the special symbol variation pattern of the second symbol of the stop symbol data “11H” and “21H” shown in the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. The reliability of the jackpot is gradually increased in the order of “variable effect pattern A046”, “variable effect pattern A050”, and “variable effect pattern A054”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), in each of "line notice A" and "character notice A", "variation effect pattern A046", "variation effect pattern A050", "variation effect pattern" In the order of “A054”, the execution ratios of the highly reliable notices (“line notice A1”, “line notice A2”, “character notice A1”, and “character notice A2”) gradually increase.

In addition, regarding the “development notice A”, “variable effect pattern A034” for “first jackpot”, “variable effect pattern A046” for “second jackpot”, and “variable effect pattern A022” for “losing” Does not develop from "Super Reach A1-1" to the next reach.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), in both the “variation effect pattern A034” for the “first jackpot” and the “variation effect pattern A046” for the “second jackpot”, the first in the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratios of "development notice A1" to "development notice A3" in which the effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state, and "development notice A4" in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projected state during the operation validity period. The total value of the execution ratios of “Advance notice A6” is set to the same value. The execution ratio of the notices A4 to A6 is set higher.

  In addition, FIG. 56 also shows the “variation effect pattern A030” for “losing”, the “variation effect pattern A042” for “first big hit”, and the “variation effect pattern A054” for “second big hit”. As shown in (c), the execution ratios of “advance notice A1” to “advance notice A6” are set.

In any of the fluctuation effects of the “variation effect pattern A042” for the “first jackpot”, the “variation effect pattern A054” for the “second jackpot”, and the “variation effect pattern A030” for the “losing”, “super” The “reach A1-1” evolves into the next “special reach A1-1”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), in both the “variation effect pattern A042” for the “first jackpot” and the “variation effect pattern A054” for the “second jackpot”, the first in the operation valid period. The total value of the execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A3” in which the effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state is the “development” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projected state during the operation validity period. It is set higher than the total value of the execution ratios of the advance notices A4 to A6, and even in the “variation effect pattern A030” for “losing”, the execution ratios of the advance notices A1 to A3 are Is set higher than the execution ratio of “development notice A4” to “development notice A6”.

In addition, in all of the variation presentation patterns for big hits and small hits shown in FIG. 44 (b), the “development notice A1” to the “development notice A3” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to protrude during the effective operation period. The total value of the execution ratios is set higher than the total value of the execution ratios of “development notice A4” to “development notice A6” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period.
On the other hand, in all of the losing variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 44 (a), the execution ratio of the “development notice A1” to the “development notice A3” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation valid period. The total value of the execution ratio of “development notice A4” to “development notice A6” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period is set higher than the total value.
That is, in the variable effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination being a big hit, the operation on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state is performed more than the advance notice performed by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the non-protruding state. The execution notice is set higher in the execution notice.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 56 (b) and (c), in any of the variable effect pattern for “losing”, the variable effect pattern for “first big hit”, and the variable effect pattern for “second big hit”. The "determined effect A1" in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is set so that the "determined effect A1" is executed at a higher rate than the "determined effect A2" in which the operation effective period is not set. A1 "and" determined effect A2 "are set.

(Specific example of the fluctuating production in production mode B)
Next, a specific example of the variable effect of the variable effect pattern in the effect mode B set in the first to 30th changes in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state will be described.
FIG. 57 (a) shows the time flow of the variable effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variable pattern designating command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101 and determines “variable effect pattern B019”. FIG. FIG. 57 (b) shows the timing of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B021”. It is a figure for explaining a flow. FIG. 57 (c) shows the timing of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B023”. It is a figure for explaining a flow.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern B019 (first big hit))
If the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-hours-saving gaming state, and the “variation effect pattern B019” is selected, the sub CPU 102a sets the state shown in FIG. An effect control for executing a variable effect from timing T ₄₀₁ to timing T ₄₀₃ shown in FIG.

  FIG. 58 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 57 (a), and the first effect button 18A.

Sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 401} to the timing _{T 402} (d-1) and the period (d-2), the period from the timing _{T 402} to the timing _{T 403} (d In (-3) and period (d-4), effect control for executing “special character reach B1-1” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (d-1) of "symbol variation B3-1".

  In the period (d-1) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a first displays on the image display device 14 the effect image (d-1) of FIG. Control.

  Then, in the period (d-2) of "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a sets the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is the first to be stopped. 58, the effect image of (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) and (d-2-3) of reach reach shown in FIG. 58 is displayed. An effect control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect control for executing a “development notice B” for promoting the development to the “special character reach B1-1” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B” as “development notice B” in accordance with the execution rate of “development notice B” in “variable effect pattern B019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. An effect control for executing any of the “expansion notice B2” is performed.

The sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means, to be effective in the "symbol variation B3-1" regardless of whether to execute the "advance notice B1" or the "advance notice B2". The period _X41 is set. The operation effective period _X41 is a reach stimulus such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped from now stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier to generate a reach state. Set during the performance of the effect.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 41,} as shown in FIG. 58, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) Is performed on the image display device 14. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge.

However, effect image (d-2-1) it is intended to be displayed when a projecting state of the first performance button 18A in the operating lifetime X ₄₁ in "Development notice B1", the first effect of the projecting state The image includes an operation promotion notification image for prompting an operation on the button 18A.

On the other hand, effect image (d-2-2) is for display when the first performance button 18A and non-projecting state in the operation lifetime X ₄₁ in "Development notice B2", a non-projecting state first The image includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation on the one effect button 18A.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of the “advance notice B1” and the “advance notice B2” in the “variable effect pattern B019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46B and the X ₄₁ (1) of FIG. as shown, the operating lifetime X _41, the first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 90%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 10%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _41, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, the reach tilt effect A corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 58) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) on the special effect symbol on the image display device 14 is executed. For the production.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", the operation during the lifetime X _71, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projected state, reach fanning effect (D-2-3 in FIG. 58) having an effect image (effect b2 (orange)) is displayed on the image display device 14 in such a manner as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of (i). Effect control to perform the effect.

(D-2-3) of FIG. 58 illustrates an example of the “advance notice B1”. Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime _{X 41,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 58 ( As shown in d-2-3), a corresponding effect (development notice) such that the effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach-inducing effect is performed.

  In addition, unlike “d-2-3” in FIG. 58, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image (effect b2) in such a manner that the effect image (effect b2) is superimposed on the special effect design of the reach-inducing effect, unlike (d-2-3) in FIG. An effect control for executing (corresponding effect) is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (d-3) of the "special character reach B1-1", and also displays the special character "character s1 (warrior)". 58, the effect images of (d-3-1), (d-3-2), and (d-4) in FIG. 58 of the content fighting with the special character “character p1 (enemy warrior)” are displayed on the image display device 14. The effect control to be displayed is performed.

Then, in the period (d-4) of the “special character reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. (D-4) in FIG. 58 in which "Character s1" defeats "Character p1" while the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where the same numerical value is obtained. ) Is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in FIG.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern B013 (losing))
In the case where the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high time-short gaming state and “variation effect pattern B013” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (d-1) and the period from the timing _{T 401} to the timing _{T 402} (d-2), the period from the timing _{T 402} to the timing _{T 403} In (d-3) and period (d-4), “special character reach B1-1” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern B019”, the sub CPU 102a determines that the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol in the “special character reach B1-1”. At the same time, and performs an effect control to display an effect image (D-1) in which "character s1" is defeated by "character p1". This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern B021 (first big hit))
If the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern B021” is selected, the sub CPU 102a determines in FIG. ), _Effect control for executing a variable effect from timing T ₅₀₁ to timing T ₅₀₃ is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern B021" run "symbol variation B3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 501} to the timing _{T 502} (e-1) and the period (e-2), timing in the period from T ₅₀₂ to the timing _{T 503} (e-2) and duration (e-3), performs the effect control for executing the "special characters reach B2-1".

Sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 501} to the timing _{T 502} (e-1) and the period (e-2), the period from the timing _{T 502} to the timing _{T 503} (e In (-3) and period (e-4), effect control for executing “special character reach B2-1” is performed.

  In the period (e-1) of "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a performs an effect control for displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14.

  In the period (e-1) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (e-1) of FIG. Effect control.

  Then, in the period (e-2) of “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a determines that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped from now has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier. In FIG. 59, the effect images of (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) and (e-2-3) of the reach stimulus shown in FIG. 59 are displayed. An effect control for displaying on the device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a controls the “symbol variation B3-1” so as to execute “development notice B” that stimulates development into “special character reach B1-1” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B” as “development notice B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “development notice B” in “fluctuating effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. The control is performed so as to execute any one of the “advance notice B2”.

The sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means, to be effective in the "symbol variation B3-1" regardless of whether to execute the "advance notice B1" or the "advance notice B2". The period _X51 is set. The operation validity period _X51 is a reach stimulus such as whether or not a special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier to generate a reach state. Set during the performance of the effect.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 51,} as shown in FIG. 59, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) Is performed on the image display device 14. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge.

However, effect image (e-2-1) is intended to be displayed when the first performance button 18A and the projecting state in the operation lifetime X ₅₁ in "Development notice B1", the first effect of the projecting state The image includes an operation promotion notification image for prompting an operation on the button 18A.

On the other hand, effect image (e-2-2) is for display when the first performance button 18A and non-projecting state in the operation lifetime X ₅₁ in "Development notice B2", a non-projecting state first The image includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation on the one effect button 18A.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratio of the “advance notice B1” and “advance notice B2” in the “variable effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46B and the X ₅₁ (1) of FIG. as shown, the operating lifetime X _51, the first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 95%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 5%.

(E-2-3) of FIG. 59 illustrates an example of the “advance notice B1”. Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime _{X 51,} based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, in FIG. 59 ( As shown in e-2-3), control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (advance notice) such that an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach-inducing effect. .

  In addition, unlike “e-2-3” in FIG. 59, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image (effect b2) in such a manner that the effect image (effect b2) is superimposed on the special effect design of the reach-inducing effect, unlike (e-2-3) in FIG. (Corresponding effect) is controlled.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (e-3) of the "special character reach B1-1", and the special character "character s2 (warrior)". Performs an effect control for displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image such as (e-3-1) in FIG. 59 in which the character fights the special character “character p2 (enemy warrior)”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a controls so as to execute the “specified effect B” in the “special character reach B2-1”. The sub CPU 102a controls the “special character reach B2-1” to execute the “determined effect B” as the special effect. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect B” as “determined effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect B” in “variable effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed so as to execute any one of “fixed effect B2”.

(E-3-2) and (e-3-3) of FIG. 59 show examples of the “determined effect B1”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect B1", the "special characters reach B2-1", sets the operating lifetime _{X 52} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A is an operation means. Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 52,} the effect of displaying an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification to prompt the operator to first performance button 18A of the protruding state ((e-3-2 in FIG. 59)) Execute. Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 52 (1) of FIG. 59, the operation lifetime _{X 52,} and the state of the first performance button 18A protruding state (second state).

Sub CPU102a, in this "decided effect B1", based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 52,} (e-3-3) of FIG. 59 As shown in the figure, the effect image of "flash b1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from the "standby position 1" via the "operation position 1-1" to the image display device 14. A “determined effect” (corresponding effect), such as moving to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the camera, is executed.

In the period (e-4) of the “special character reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. In FIG. 59 (e-4) in which "Character s2" defeats "Character p2", the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value. The effect control for displaying the effect image shown on the image display device 14 is performed.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

  Note that the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in the “determined effect B” in the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. Position).

Further, in the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” in the “determined effect B”. So that they only move up to
As described above, in the “determination effect B” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is lower than the “operation position 1-1”. Is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the result of the jackpot determination is that the first result of the 16R (round) that is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the second jackpot game of 4R (round) It informs that it has won the "1st big hit" to play a big hit game.

Then, in the period (e-3) of the “special character reach B2-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. (E-4) of FIG. 59 in which "character s2" has defeated "character p2" while the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they have the same numerical value. ) Is controlled on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect according to variation effect pattern B015 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state and “variation effect pattern B015” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variable effect similar to the “variable effect pattern B021” shown in (b) is controlled. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (e-1) and the period from the timing _{T 501} to the timing _{T 502} (e-2), the period from the timing _{T 502} to the timing _{T 503} In (e-3) and period (e-4), effect control is performed so as to execute “special character reach B2-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect B” as “determined effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect B” in “variable effect pattern B015” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. The control for executing any one of the “determined effect B2” is performed.

  However, in the variable effect of “variable effect pattern B015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member regardless of whether “special effect B1” or “determined effect B2” of “special character reach B2-1” is executed. 17A is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol among the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and stops the "character s2" by the "character p2". An effect control for displaying the effect image of (E-1) in FIG. 59 is performed. This notifies the player that the jackpot determination result is "losing".

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern B023 (first big hit))
In the case where the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-short-time gaming state, and the “variation effect pattern B023” is selected, the sub CPU 102a determines in FIG. ) _Is performed to execute a variable effect from timing T ₆₀₁ to timing T ₆₀₃ .

Sub CPU102a, in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern B023" run "symbol variation B3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 601} to the timing _{T 602} (f-1) and the period (f-2), timing In the period (f-3) and the period (f-4) from T ₆₀₂ to timing T ₆₀₃ , effect control is performed so as to execute “special character reach B3-1”.

In variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern B023", effect contents of the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing _{T 601} to the timing _{T 602} is "change effect pattern This is the same as the effect content of “Symbol variation B3-1” of “B019”.

Sub CPU102a the operation lifetime _{X 61} to shown in FIG. 57 (c) corresponds to the operation lifetime _{X 41} shown in FIG. 57 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (f-3) of the "special character reach B3-1" and also displays the special character "character s3 (warrior)". (Not shown) performs an effect control so that an effect image in which the special character "character p3 (enemy warrior)" (not shown) fights is displayed on the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a performs control to execute “decision effect B” as a special effect in “special character reach B3-1”. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect B” as “determined effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect B” in the “variable effect pattern B023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect B2” is executed.
Incidentally, the sub CPU102a is the "decided effect B1", sets the operating lifetime _{X 62} as shown in FIG. 57 (c).

In the period (f-4) of the “special character reach B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. With the same numerical value as above, the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and an effect image notifying that “character s3” has defeated “character p3” is displayed on the image display device 14. Is displayed.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect according to variation effect pattern B017 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the first to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state and “variation effect pattern B017” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. The effect control is performed so as to execute the same variable effect as the “variable effect pattern B023” shown in (c). That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period from the timing _{T 601} to the timing _{T 602} (f-2), the period from the timing _{T 602} to the timing _{T 603} The effect control is performed so as to execute “special character reach B3-1” in (f-3) and period (f-4).

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect B” as “determined effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect B” in the “variable effect pattern B017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect B2” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern B017”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member regardless of whether the “special effect B1” or the “special effect B2” of the “special character reach B3-1” is executed. 17A is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol and stops the "character s3" by the "character p3". By displaying an effect image (not shown), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c) are a part of the special effect type determination table of the variable effect pattern for loss in effect mode B in FIG. 46 (a), and a big hit in effect mode B in effect mode B in FIG. It is the figure which extracted and constituted a part of the special effect type determination table of the fluctuation effect pattern for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), regarding the “advance notice B”, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern B005” for “losing”, the reach does not evolve from “symbol change B3-1”.
Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 60A, in the “fluctuating effect pattern B005” for “losing”, the execution ratio of “development notice B2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation effective period. Is set to a high value of 95%, and "development notice B1" in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation valid period is set to a low value of 5%.

  On the other hand, in the “floating effect pattern B013”, which is a variable effect pattern for “losing” and develops from “symbol fluctuation B3-1” to “special character reach B1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice B1” is 70. %, And the execution ratio of the “advance notice B2” is set to 30%.

  Then, in the “floating effect pattern B019” which is a fluctuating effect pattern for “first big hit” and develops from “symbol fluctuation B3-1” to “special character reach B1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice B1” Is set to 90%, and the execution ratio of the “advance notice B2” is set to 10%.

  In addition, in the variable effect pattern for the “second jackpot”, in the “variable effect pattern B025” that evolves from “symbol change B3-1” to “special character reach B1-1”, the execution ratio of “advance notice B1” Is set to 88%, and the execution ratio of the “advance notice B2” is set to 12%.

  Also, in comparison with the execution ratio set in the above-described “variation effect pattern B005”, “variation effect pattern B015” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern B021” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “fluctuation effect pattern B027” for the “second jackpot”, the execution ratios of the “advance notice B1” and the “advance notice B2” are set as shown in FIG.

  Also, in comparison with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern B005”, “variation effect pattern B017” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern B023” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “fluctuation effect pattern B029” for the “second jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the execution ratios of the “development notice B1” and the “development notice B2” are set.

In addition, in all of the jackpot and small hit variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 46B, the total value of the execution ratio of the “development notice B1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is: The execution rate is set to be higher than the total value of the execution ratio of “advance notice B2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period.
On the other hand, in all of the losing variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 46 (a), the operation value is larger than the total value of the execution ratio of “development notice B1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to protrude during the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratio of the “advance notice B2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the valid period is set higher.
That is, in the variable effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination being a big hit, the operation on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state is performed more than the advance notice performed by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the non-protruding state. The execution notice is set higher in the execution notice.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 (b) and (c), in any of the variable effect pattern for "losing", the variable effect pattern for "first big hit", and the variable effect pattern for "second big hit". The "determined effect B1" in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is executed at a higher rate than the "determined effect B2" in which the operation effective period is not set. B1 "and" determined effect B2 "are set.

(Specific examples of the fluctuating production in production mode C)
Next, a specific example of the variable effect of the variable effect pattern in the effect mode C set in the 31st to 74th changes in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state will be described with reference to FIG. 61.
FIG. 61 (a) shows the time flow of the variable effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variable pattern designating command “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variable effect pattern C019”. FIG. FIG. 61 (b) shows the timing of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C021”. It is a figure for explaining a flow. FIG. 61 (c) shows the timing of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C023”. It is a figure for explaining a flow.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern C019 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” in the 31st to 74th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern C019” is selected, the sub CPU 102a executes FIG. ) _Is performed to execute a variable effect from timing T ₇₀₁ to timing T ₇₀₃ .

  FIG. 62 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 61 (a), the first effect button 18A, and the first decorative member 17A.

Sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (g-1) and the period from the timing _{T 701} to the timing _{T 702} (g-2), the period from the timing _{T 702} to the timing _{T 703} (g -3) and the period (g-4), the “attack reach C1-1” is executed.

  In the period (g-1) of the "symbol change C3-1", the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14.

  In the period (g-1) of the "symbol change C3-1", the sub CPU 102a first displays on the image display device 14 the effect image (g-1) of FIG. Execute

  Then, in the period (g-2) of “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped from being the same as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier. 62, the effect image of (g-2-1) or (g-2-2) and (g-2-3) of reach reach shown in FIG. 62 is displayed. Control for displaying on the device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes a “development notice C” that stimulates the development to the “attack reach C1-1” as a special effect in the “symbol variation C3-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice C1” and “development notice C” as “development notice C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “development notice C” in “variable effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “expansion notice C2” is executed.

The sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means, to be effective in the "symbol variation C3-1" regardless of whether to execute the "advance notice C1" or the "advance notice C2". A period _X71 is set. The operation valid period _X71 is a reach stimulus such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped from now stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped earlier to generate a reach state. Set during the performance of the effect.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 71,} as shown in FIG. 62, including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A (g-2-1) or (g-2-2) Is performed on the image display device 14. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge.

However, effect image (g-2-1) is intended to be displayed when a projecting state of the first performance button 18A in the operating lifetime X ₇₁ in "Development notice C1", the first effect of the projecting state The image includes an operation promotion notification image for prompting an operation on the button 18A.

On the other hand, effect image (g-2-2) is for display when the first performance button 18A and non-projecting state in the operation lifetime X ₇₁ in "Development notice C2", the non-projecting state first The image includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation on the one effect button 18A.

The sub CPU 102a determines the execution ratios of the “advance notice C1” and the “advance notice C2” in the “variable effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48B and the X ₇₁ (1) of FIG. As shown, in the operation validity period _X71 , the first effect button 18A is set in a protruding state at a rate of 92%, and is set in a non-protruding state at a rate of 8%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice C1" during operation lifetime X _71, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, the reach tilt effect A corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 62) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) on the special effect symbol on the image display device 14 is executed. .

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice C2", the operation during the lifetime X _71, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projected state, reach fanning effect (G-2-3 in FIG. 62) having an effect image (effect c2 (red)) superimposed on the special effect design is displayed on the image display device 14. I do.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (g-3) of the "attack reach C1-1" and the character "character b1 (samurai)" is displayed. Control is performed on the image display device 14 to display an effect image such as (g-3-1) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “fixed effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in the “variable effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.

(G-3-2) and (g-3-3) of FIG. 62 show examples of the “determined effect C1”. Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect C1", in "attack reach C1-1", sets the operating lifetime _{X 72} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A is an operation means. In operation effective period X _72, operation promotion notification (notification promote the image along with the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge of projected state consisting of the letter "before you press!" To promote the operation of the first performance button 18A to the player ). Further, as shown in _X 72 (1) of FIG. 62, the operation lifetime _{X 72,} the state of the first performance button 18A is the protruding state (second state).

Sub CPU102a is, in the "decided effect C1", based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 72,} in the image display device 14, "flash c1" Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operating position 1-1” to the “operating position” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. A “determined effect” (corresponding effect), such as moving to “1-2”, is executed.

  Further, in the “fixed effect C2”, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation validity period, and in the image display device 14, the effect image of the “flash light c1” that stimulates the winning of the big hit. Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” at a preset timing to the “operation position”, which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. A determined effect (corresponding effect) such as moving to “1-2” is executed.

  In the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in the “determined effect C”. Position).

In addition, in the variable effect performed when the result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” in the “determined effect C”. So that they only move up to
As described above, in the “determined effect C” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is lower than the “operation position 1-1”. Is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the result of the jackpot determination is that the first result of the 16R (round) that is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the second jackpot game of 4R (round) It informs that it has won the "1st big hit" to play a big hit game.

Then, in the period (g-4) of the “attack reach C1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and a notification that “character b1” has “defeated” the enemy is shown in FIG. 62 (g-4). ) Is controlled to display the effect image shown on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern C013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” at the 31st to 74th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the high time-short gaming state, and the “variation effect pattern C013” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variable effect similar to the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 701} to the timing _{T 702} (g-1) and the period (g-2), the period from the timing _{T 702} (g-3 ), “Attack reach C1-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C013” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C019”, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether the “determined effect C1” or the “determined effect C2” of the “attack reach C1-1” is executed. Is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol among the three special rendering symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies the character "b1" that the attack has failed. By displaying the image (G-1), the fact that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "losing" is notified.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern C021 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” in the 31st to 74th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern C021” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a ) _{Is performed} from timing T ₈₀₁ to timing T ₈₀₃ .

Sub CPU102a, in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C021" run "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 801} to the timing _{T 802} (h-1) and time (h-2), timing In the period (h-3) and the period (h-4) from T ₈₀₂ to timing T ₈₀₃ , “attack reach C2-1” is executed.

In the fluctuating effect of “fluctuating effect pattern C021”, the effect content of “symbol fluctuation C3-1” in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from timing T ₈₀₁ to timing T ₈₀₂ is “fluctuation effect pattern”. This is the same as the effect content of “symbol variation C3-1” of “C019”. Figure 61 (b) to the operating lifetime _{X 81} shown corresponds to the operation lifetime _{X 71} shown in FIG. 61 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (h-3) of the "attack reach C2-1", and the character "q2 (samurai)" sprints. Then, control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14, for example, to make an attack.

The sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect C” as a special effect during the period (h-3) of the “attack reach C2-1”. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution rate of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C021” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.
Sub CPU102a, when executing the "decided effect C1" in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C021" sets the operating lifetime _{X 82} as shown in FIG. 61 (b). Operation In lifetime _{X 82,} and the state of the first performance button 18A protruding state (second state).

Then, in the period (h-4) of the “attack reach C2-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that "character q2" has "defeated" the enemy Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern C015 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” in the 31st to 74th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the high time-short gaming state, and “variation effect pattern C015” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C021” shown in (b) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h−1) and the period (h−2) from the timing T ₈₀₁ to the timing T _802, and performs the period (h−3) from the timing T _802. ), “Attack reach C2-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C015” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C015”, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decoration member 17A regardless of whether the “determination effect C1” or the “determination effect C2” of the “attack reach C1-1” is executed. Is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol among the three special rendering symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies the character "q2" that the attack has failed. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern C023 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” at the 31st to 74th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “change effect pattern C023” is selected, the sub CPU 102 a ) _{Is performed} from timing T ₉₀₁ to timing T ₉₀₃ .

Sub CPU102a, in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C023" run "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 901} to the timing _{T 902} (i-1) and the period (i-2), timing executing the "attack reach C3-1" in the period from T ₉₀₂ to the timing _{T 903} (i-3) and the period (i-4).

In variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C023", effect contents of the "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing _{T 901} to the timing _{T 902} is "change effect pattern This is the same as the effect content of “symbol variation C3-1” of “C019”.
That is, in the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2), the sub CPU 102a determines the effect image (i-1) and the effect image (i-2) of FIG. Is displayed.
Then, the operation lifetime _{X 91} shown in FIG. 61 (c) corresponds to the operation lifetime _{X 71} shown in FIG. 61 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) of the same numerical value during the period (i-3) of the “attack reach C3-1” and the “character q3 (ronin)” sprints. Then, control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14, for example, to make an attack.

The sub CPU 102a executes “fixed effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C3-1”. The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.
Sub CPU102a, when executing the "decided effect C1" in variation effect of "fluctuation demonstration pattern C023" sets the operating lifetime _{X 92} as shown in FIG. 61 (c).

Then, during the period (i-4) of the “attack reach C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that "character q3" has "defeated" the enemy Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.
(Variable production according to the variation production pattern C017 (losing))
When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” at the 31st to 74th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “change effect pattern C017” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically performs the processing in FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C023” shown in (c) is executed. That is, the sub CPU102a performs "symbol variation C3-1" in the period from the timing _{T 901} to the timing _{T 902} (i-1) and the period (i-2), the period from the timing _{T 902} (i-3 )) Is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect C” as “determined effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect C” in “variable effect pattern C017” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect C2” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C017”, the sub CPU 102a performs the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether the “determined effect C1” or the “determined effect C2” of the “attack reach C3-1” is executed. Is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol out of the three special rendering symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies the character "q3" that the attack has failed. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c) are a part of the special effect type determination table of the variable effect pattern for loss in effect mode C in FIG. 48 (a), and a big hit in effect mode C in effect mode C in FIG. 48 (b). It is the figure which extracted and constituted a part of the special effect type determination table of the fluctuation effect pattern for small hits.

Regarding the “development notice C”, in the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern C005” for “losing”, the reach does not evolve from the “symbol fluctuation C3-1”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), in the “fluctuation effect pattern C005”, the execution ratio of the “development notice C2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-protruding state during the operation valid period is 95%. The “development notice C1”, which is set to a high value and the first effect button 18A is controlled to protrude during the operation valid period, is set to a low value of 5%.

  On the other hand, in the variation production pattern for “losing”, in the “variation production pattern C013” that develops from “symbol variation C3-1” to “attack reach C1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice C1” is 70%. , And the execution ratio of the “advance notice C2” is set to 30%.

  Then, in the variable effect pattern for the “first jackpot”, in the “variable effect pattern C019” that evolves from “symbol change C3-1” to “attack reach C1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice C1” is It is set to 92%, and the execution ratio of the “advance notice C2” is set to 8%.

  Further, in the variable effect pattern for the “second jackpot”, in the “variable effect pattern C025” that evolves from “symbol change C3-1” to “attack reach C1-1”, the execution ratio of “development notice C1” is It is set to 90%, and the execution ratio of “advance notice C2” is set to 10%.

  Also, in comparison with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern C005”, “variation effect pattern D015” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern D021” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “fluctuation effect pattern D027” for the “second jackpot”, as shown in FIG. 63B, the execution ratios of the “development notice C1” and the “development notice C2” are set.

  Also, in comparison with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern C005”, “variation effect pattern C017” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern C023” for “first big hit”, and “ In the “fluctuation effect pattern C029” for the “second jackpot”, the execution ratios of the “development notice C1” and the “development notice C2” are set as shown in FIG. 63 (c).

Note that in all of the jackpot and small hit variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 48 (b), the total value of the execution ratio of the “development notice C1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to protrude during the operation valid period is , The first effect button 18A is set to be higher than the total value of the execution ratio of the “advance notice C2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period.
On the other hand, in all of the losing variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 48 (a), the operation value is larger than the total value of the execution ratio of the “development notice C1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to protrude during the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratio of the “advance notice C2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the valid period is set higher.
That is, in the variable effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination being a big hit, the operation on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state is performed more than the advance notice performed by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the non-protruding state. The execution notice is set higher in the execution notice.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b) and (c), in any of the variable effect pattern for “losing”, the variable effect pattern for “first big hit”, and the variable effect pattern for “second big hit”. The "determined effect C1" in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is executed at a higher rate than the "determined effect C2" in which the operation effective period is not set. C1 "and" determined effect C2 "are set.

Next, a specific example of the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the time reduction game state will be described.
In the effect mode D, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect control so as to execute a variable effect having a Janken effect in which two characters perform “Janken” as the variable effect.

  FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D019”. FIG. 64B is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D022”. FIG. 64 (c) is a diagram for describing the temporal flow of the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D25”.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern D019 (first big hit))
If the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” in the 75th to 84th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern D019” is selected, the sub CPU 102a sets the state shown in FIG. ), _Effect control for executing a variable effect from timing T ₁₀₀₁ to timing T ₁₀₀₄ is performed.

  FIG. 65 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 64 (a), the first effect button 18A, and the first decorative member 17A.

The sub CPU 102a performs the “symbol variation D1-1” in the period (j-1) to the period (j-3) from the timing T ₁₀₀₁ to the timing T _1002, and the period (j) from the timing T ₁₀₀₂ to the timing T _1003. -4), effect control is performed to execute "Janken reach D1-1 (win)" in the period (j-5).

  In the period (j-1) of "symbol variation D1-1", the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (j-1) in FIG. 65 in which a plurality of special effect symbols are varied, and in the period (j-2). The effect control is performed so that the effect image of (j-2) of FIG. 65 in which the character display of “Let's win two times!

  In the period (j-3) of "symbol fluctuation D1-1", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped earlier. The content of (j-3-) in FIG. 65, in which the character “charr1” as the ally and the character “character u1” as the opponent perform the first match, along with the reach of whether to perform the game. 1) or effect control for displaying the effect images of (j-3-2) and (j-3-3) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a, in the effect of the reach reach, as shown in the effect images (j-3-1), (j-3-2), and (j-3-3) of FIG. "Development notice D" to encourage the development of "1 (win)". The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1” and “development notice D” as “development notice D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “development notice D” in “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control for executing any one of the “expansion notice D2”.

The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means, during the period (j-3) regardless of whether to execute the “advance notice D1” or the “advance notice D2” as a special effect. The operation valid period _X101 to be performed is set.

Sub CPU102a, in operation valid period _{X 101} controls to perform operations promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A to the player. Sub CPU102a, the protruding state in the operation lifetime _{X 101,} as the "development notice D1" a of Figure 65, if (j-3-1) are shown as projecting state of the first performance button 18A (a second state) Is controlled to execute an operation prompting message for prompting the operation of the first effect button 18A, and in the case of “development notice D2”, the first effect button 18A is pressed as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. As the non-projecting state (first state), control is performed so as to execute operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state.

Sub CPU102a, when executing the "development notice D1" in operation valid period _{X 101,} with the first performance button 18A protruding state (second state), in FIG. 65 (j-3-1 ), The image of the first effect button 18 </ b> A and the timer gauge in the protruding state, and the image of “Press! An effect is displayed on the image display device 14, which is an operation promotion notification effect image for prompting the operation of the first effect button 18 </ b> A.

On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, when executing the "development notice D2", in operation valid period _{X 101,} with the first performance button 18A and a non-protruding state (first state), in FIG. 65 (j- As shown in 3-2), the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge in the non-projecting state together with the effect image in which "character r1" and "character u1" are "janken" in the introduction portion of the janken Then, an effect is displayed on the image display device 14, where the effect image is composed of the characters “press !!” and is an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the first effect button 18 </ b> A.
In addition, when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15.

The sub CPU 102a determines the execution ratios of the “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” in the “fluctuating effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b) and X ₁₀₁ (1) of FIG. as shown, the operating lifetime X _101, a first performance button 18A and a protruding state at a rate of 92%, and non-projecting state at a rate of 8%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice D1", during operation lifetime X _101, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the projecting state, the reach tilt effect The special effect design and the effect image (effect d1 (blue)) having the effect image (effect d1 (blue)) superimposed on the effect image in which “character r1” wins “character u1” in the first round of Janken (FIG. 65 (j− 3-3)) is displayed on the image display device 14, and a corresponding effect (advance notice) is executed.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice D2", the operation during the lifetime X _101, based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A of the non-projected state, reach fanning effect 65 and the effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) having an effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) superimposed on the effect image in which "character r1" will win "character u1" in the first match of the Janken game. -3-3)) is displayed on the image display device 14, and a corresponding effect (advance notice) is executed.

  As shown in (j-4-1) in FIG. 65, the sub CPU 102a determines that two identical “Janken reach D1-1 (win)” in the period (j-4) of “Janken reach D1-1” When the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed, "character notice D" is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement D” as the “character announcement D” according to the execution ratio of the “character announcement D” in the “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Of the character notice D3.

Regardless of the case where any one of "character notice D1" to "character notice D3" is executed as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period for validating the operation of the first effect button 18A in the period (j-4). Y ₁₀₁ is set. In operation lifetime _{Y 101,} sub CPU102a does not perform the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A to the player. In operation lifetime _{Y 101,} sub CPU102a, as shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. 65, having no effect images the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A to the player indicate.

The sub CPU102a is Figure 50 "characters notice D1" in set in special effect type determination table "variation demonstration pattern D019" of (b) ~ _{Y 101} of execution ratio and 65 of "Character notice D3" (1 as shown in), the operating lifetime _{Y 101,} a first performance button 18A and a non-protruding state at a rate of 100%.

(J-4-2) of FIG. 65 illustrates an example in which the “character notice D1” is executed. In "Character notice D1", sub CPU102a, based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 101} is, in (j-4-2) of FIG. 65 As shown in the figure, control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) of displaying “character d1”, which is a support character of “character r1”, on the image display device 14.

The sub CPU102a, based on the one pressing operation on the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 101} is, as cheering character "character r1", the "character notice D2", " A control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such that “character d2” is displayed, and “character d3” is displayed in “character notice D3”.

  Then, after executing this "character notice D", the sub CPU 102a sets "character r1" and "character u1" as shown in (j-4-3) and (j-4-4) of FIG. Performs an effect control for displaying an effect image on the image display device 14 indicating that the second match is to be played.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D” as a special effect, as shown in the effect image of (j-4-3) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution rate of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed.

When executing “decided effect D1” as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a activates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the period (j-4) of “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”. The validity period X ₁₀₂ is set. Sub CPU102a, in the operating lifetime _{X 102,} execution ratio and figures "decided effect D1", "decided effect D2" in set in special effect type determination table "variation demonstration pattern D019" in FIG. 50 (b) As shown in _X102 (1) of 65, the state of the first effect button 18A is set to a protruding state (second state). The sub CPU102a, in this operation valid period _{X 102,} as shown in (j-4-3) of FIG. 65, "Character r1" and "character u1" and is "rock", "scissors", "par Is displayed in the effect image before any one of the first effect buttons 18A and the timer gauge in the protruding state, and the first effect button 18A in the protruding state, which includes a character display of "press!" The effect control is performed so as to display the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation.

Sub CPU102a is the "decided effect D1", based on the one pressing operation is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 102,} in the image display device 14, the winning of the jackpot The effect image of the flashing “flash d1” is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” via the “operating position 1-1” to a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. Is performed to the "operation position 1-2".

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation validity period, and moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” at a preset timing. Moving to the “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, and displaying an effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 that encourages winning of a jackpot. The determined effect (corresponding effect) is executed.

In addition, in the variable effect performed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” in the “determined effect D”. So that they only move up to
As described above, in the “determined effect D” of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first big hit”, the first decorative member 17A is lower than the “operation position 1-1”. Is moved to the “operation position 1-2”, the result of the jackpot determination is that the first result of the 16R (round) that is more advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” that performs the second jackpot game of 4R (round) It informs that it has won the "1st big hit" to play a big hit game.

After the execution of the “determined effect D” in the period (j-4) of the “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a executes the “Janken 2” as shown in the effect image (j-4-5) of FIG. In the second round, after “Character r1” outputs “Choki” and “Character u1” outputs “Par”, a display image showing that “Character r1” wins “Character u1” is displayed. As shown in the effect image (j-5) of FIG. 65 in -5), the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is the same as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed first. 65, the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value, and the effect image of (j-5) in FIG. 65 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect according to variation effect pattern D010 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the 75th to 84th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the high time-short gaming state, and the “variation effect pattern D010” is selected, the sub CPU 102a returns to FIG. A variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D019” shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the “symbol variation D1-1”, that is, the “character r1” in the period (j−1) to the period (j-3) from the timing T ₁₀₀₁ to the timing T ₁₀₀₂ to “char a u1” once. The control is performed so as to execute the “floating effect of the special effect symbol” including the effect of winning with the first janken, and then execute “janken reach D1-1 (losing)”. In this “Janken reach D1-1 (losing)”, similarly to the fluctuation effect in the period (j−4) from the timing T _{1002 of} “Janken reach D1-1 (winning)”, “character r1” is changed to “character u1”. And a reach effect including an effect of performing the second round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “determined effect D” as the special effect in the period (j-4), similarly to the “variable effect pattern D019”, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D010” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the "determined effect D1" and the "determined effect D2" of the "variable effect pattern D010".

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D010”, the sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect D1” in the “Janken reach D1-1 (losing)”, as shown in FIG. 65 (J-1). Then, in the second round of the Janken, after "Character r1" displays "Choki" and "Character u1" displays "Goo", and after displaying a rendering image of "Character r1" losing to "Character u1", As shown in the effect image (J-2) of FIG. 65, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed first. In this way, effect control for displaying an effect image for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value is performed on the image display device 14. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern D022 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” at the 75th to 84th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “fluctuation effect pattern D022” is selected, the sub CPU 102a executes FIG. ) _{Is performed} from timing T ₁₁₀₁ to timing T ₁₁₀₃ .

The sub CPU 102a executes the “symbol variation D2-1” in a period (k-1) to a period (k-3) from the timing T ₁₁₀₁ to the timing T _1102, and executes a period (k) from the timing T ₁₁₀₂ to the timing T _1103. -4) and in the period (k-5), "Janken reach D2-1 (win)" is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the same effect as “symbol variation D1-1” in “symbol variation D2-1”. In other words, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (k-1). Then, in the period (k-2) of "symbol variation D2-1", an effect image (not shown) in which the character display of "Janken wins three times!" The effect control is performed so as to be displayed on the display device 14.

  In the period (k-3) of “symbol fluctuation D2-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped earlier. Along with the reach of whether or not to do so, a performance image (not shown) that indicates that "Character r1" as an ally character and "Character u1" as an opponent character perform the first round of janken An effect control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” that stimulates the development to “Janken reach D2-1 (win)” in this reach-producing effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D” as “development notice D” in accordance with the execution rate of “development notice D” in “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control for executing any one of the “expansion notice D2”.

The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means, during the period (k-3) regardless of whether to execute the "advance notice D1" or the "advance notice D2" as a special effect. The operation valid period _X111 to be performed is set.

The sub CPU 102a sets the execution ratios of the “advance notice D1” and the “advance notice D2” in the “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50B and the X ₁₁₁ (1) of FIG. As shown, in the operation validity period _X111 , the first effect button 18A is in the protruding state at a rate of 96%, and is in the non-protruding state at a rate of 4%.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken reach D2-1 (win)” during the period (k-4) of “Janken reach D2-1”. Then, “character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement D” as the “character announcement D” according to the execution ratio of the “character announcement D” in the “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Of the character notice D3.

Regardless of the case where any one of "character notice D1" to "character notice D3" is executed as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 18A is effective in the period (k-4). setting the Y _111.

  After executing “character notice D” in “Janken reach D2-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs the second and third rounds of “Jaken r1” and “Chara u1”, An effect control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image having a content that “r1” continuously wins “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect D” in the effect of the third round of Janken in the latter half of the period (k-4). The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed.

When performing the “decided effect D1” as the special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs the third time of the effect of “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)” in the second half of the period (k-4) of the “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”. setting the operating lifetime _{X 112} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A. Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime X ₁₁₂ of the "decided effect D1" is "character r1" and "character u1" and "rock" in the third round eyes Janken is, "scissors", put either "par" An operation prompt for prompting the operation of the protruding first effect button 18A, which includes a protruding first effect button 18A and a timer gauge and a character display of "Let's press!" Effect control so as to display the image.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation validity period, and moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” at a preset timing. Moving to the “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, and displaying an effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 that encourages winning of a jackpot. The determined effect (corresponding effect) is executed.

After the execution of the “determined effect D” in the period (k-4) of the “janken reach D2-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a produces an effect in which “character r1” beats “character u1” in the third match of the Janken. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) which is changing during the period (k-5) has the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed earlier. An effect control for displaying an effect image on the image display device 14 in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where the same numerical value is aligned (777) is performed.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern D013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the 75th to 84th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the high time-short gaming state, and the “variation effect pattern D013” is selected, the sub CPU 102a returns to FIG. A variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D022” shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a sets the “symbol variation D2-1”, that is, the “character r1” in the period (k−1) to the period (k−3) from the timing T ₁₁₀₁ to the timing T ₁₁₀₂ once to “the character u1”. The control is performed so as to execute the “floating effect of the special effect symbol” including the effect of winning with the janken of the eye, and then execute “janken reach D2-1 (losing)”. In this “Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)”, similarly to the fluctuation effect of the period (k−4) from the timing T _{1102 of} “Janken Reach D2-1 (winning)”, “character r1” is changed to “character u1”. And the second and third round of Janken, but in the second round of Janken, "character r1" wins over "character u1," and in the third round of Janken, "character r1" loses on "character u1." Perform the reach production of.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “determined effect D” as the special effect in the period (k−4), similarly to the “variable effect pattern D022”, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D013”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in “variable effect pattern D013” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the "determined effect D1" and the "determined effect D2" of the "variable effect pattern D013".

  However, in the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern D013”, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” in “Janken reach D2-1 (losing)”, and then “character r1” is “ After displaying the effect image of losing to "character u1", the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed first. Then, effect control for displaying an effect image for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned to the same numerical value is performed on the image display device 14. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variable production according to the variable production pattern D025 (first big hit))
When the determination result of the big hit is “first big hit” in the 75th to 84th change in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and the “variation effect pattern D025” is selected, the sub CPU 102a sets the state shown in FIG. ) _Is executed from timing T ₁₂₀₁ to timing T ₁₂₀₃ .

The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation D3-1” in a period (l−1) to a period (l-3) from the timing T ₁₂₀₁ to the timing T _1202, and performs a period (l) from the timing T ₁₂₀₂ to the timing T _1203. -4) and the period (1-5), "Janken reach D3-1 (win)" is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the same effect as “symbol variation D1-1” in “symbol variation D3-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (l-1). Then, in the period (l-2) of "symbol variation D3-1", an effect image (not shown) in which the character display of "Let's win Janken four times!" The effect control is performed so as to be displayed on the display device 14.

  In the period (l-3) of "symbol variation D3-1", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped earlier. Along with the reach of whether or not to do so, a performance image (not shown) that indicates that "Character r1" as an ally character and "Character u1" as an opponent character perform the first round of janken An effect control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” that stimulates the development to “Janken reach D3-1 (win)” in this reach-producing effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D” as “development notice D” according to the execution rate of “development notice D” in “variable effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control for executing any one of the “expansion notice D2”.

The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means, during the period (l-3) regardless of whether to execute the "advance notice D1" or the "advance notice D2" as a special effect. The operation valid period _X121 to be performed is set.

Sub CPU102a, as shown in the execution ratio of "Development notice D1", "Development notice D025" in the set by the special effect type determination table in FIG. 50 (b) "fluctuation demonstration pattern D025", the operation lifetime _{X 121} Then, the first effect button 18A is set in a protruding state at a rate of 100%.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken reach D3-1 (win)” during the period (1-4) of “Janken reach D3-1”. Then, “character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the “character announcement D” as the “character announcement D” in accordance with the execution ratio of the “character announcement D” in the “variable effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Of the character notice D3.

Regardless of the case where any one of "character notice D1" to "character notice D3" is executed as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period for validating the operation of the first effect button 18A in the period (1-4). Set _Y121 .

  After executing “character notice D” in “Janken reach D3-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs the second to fourth rounds of “Jaken r1” and “Chara u1”, An effect control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image having a content that “r1” continuously wins “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect D” in the effect of the fourth round of Janken in the latter half of the period (1-4). The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “determined effect D” in the “variable effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed.

When performing the “decided effect D1” as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs the fourth time in the second half of the effect of “Janken reach D3-1 (win)” in the period (1-4) of the “Janken reach”. setting the operating lifetime _{X 122} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A. Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime X ₁₂₂ of the "decided effect D1" is "character r1" and "character u1" and "rock" in the fourth round eyes Janken is, "scissors", put either "par" An operation prompt for prompting the operation of the protruding first effect button 18A, which includes a protruding first effect button 18A and a timer gauge and a character display of "Let's press!" Effect control so as to display the image.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation validity period, and moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” via the “operation position 1-1” at a preset timing. Moving to the "operation position 1-2" which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, and displaying an effect image of "flash d2" which stimulates the winning of a big hit on the image display device 14. The determined effect (corresponding effect) is executed.

After the execution of the “determined effect D” during the period (1-4) of the “Janken reach D3-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a produces an effect in which “character r1” beats “character u1” in the fourth round of the Janken game. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing during the period (1-5) has the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed earlier. An effect control for displaying an effect image on the image display device 14 in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where the same numerical value is aligned (777) is performed.
Thereby, the player is notified that the first jackpot in which the jackpot game (first jackpot game) of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variable production according to the variation production pattern D016 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” in the 75th to 84th variation in the high-probability game state and the high time-short game state, and “variation effect pattern D016” is selected, the sub CPU 102a sets “variation effect pattern D025” And a fluctuation effect substantially the same as the fluctuation effect is performed. In other words, the sub CPU 102a sets the “symbol variation D3-1” in the period (l-1) to the period (l-3) from the timing T ₁₂₀₁ to the timing T ₁₂₀₂ , that is, the “chara r1” to the “chara u1” once. The control is performed so that "Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)" is executed after the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning with the first Janken. In this “Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)”, similarly to the fluctuation effect in the period (1-4) from the timing T _{1202 of} “Janken Reach D3-1 (winning)”, “character r1” is changed to “character u1”. , And a reach effect including an effect of performing the second to fourth rounds of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “determined effect D” as the special effect in the period (1-4), similarly to the “variable effect pattern D025”, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D016”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines “determined effect D” as “determined effect D” in accordance with the execution rate of “determined effect D” in the “variable effect pattern D016” set in the special effect type determining table of FIG. One of the “determined effect D2” is executed.

  However, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D016”, the sub CPU 102a executes “fixed effect D1” in “Janken reach D3-1 (losing)”, and then “character r1” changes to “Character r1” in the fourth round of the Janken. After displaying the effect image of losing to "character u1", the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) stopped and displayed first. Then, effect control for displaying an effect image for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned to the same numerical value is performed on the image display device 14. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) are a part of the special effect type determination table of the variable effect pattern for loss in effect mode D in FIG. 50 (a), and a big hit in effect mode D in effect mode D in FIG. It is the figure which extracted and constituted a part of the special effect type determination table of the fluctuation effect pattern for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), regarding the “advance notice D”, in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D001” for “losing”, the reach does not evolve from “symbol change D1-1”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the “variation effect pattern D001” for “losing”, the execution ratio of “development notice D2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation valid period Is set to a high value of 95%, and the "development notice D1" in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to protrude during the operation effective period is set to a low value of 5%.

  On the other hand, in the “floating effect pattern D010” which is a variable effect pattern for “losing” and develops from “symbol fluctuation D1-1” to “Janken reach D1-1 (losing)”, the execution rate of “development notice D1” Is set to 70%, and the execution ratio of “development notice D2” is set to 30%.

  And, it is a variable effect pattern for the "first jackpot", and in the "variable effect pattern D019" that evolves from "symbol change D1-1" to "Janken reach D1-1 (win)", the "advance notice D1" The execution ratio is set to 92%, and the execution ratio of “development notice D2” is set to 8%.

  Further, in the variable effect pattern for the “second jackpot”, in the “variable effect pattern D028” that evolves from “symbol change D1-1” to “Janken reach (win)”, the execution ratio of “development notice D1” is It is set to 90%, and the execution ratio of “development notice D2” is set to 10%.

  Also, in comparison with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern D001”, “variation effect pattern D013” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern D022” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “fluctuation effect pattern D031” for the “second big hit”, the execution ratios of the “development notice D1” and the “development notice D2” are set as shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in comparison with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern D001”, “variation effect pattern D016” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern D025” for “first big hit”, and “ The execution ratio of the “development notice D1” and the “development notice D2” is also set in the “variation effect pattern D034” for the “second jackpot” as shown in FIG. 66 (c).

In addition, in all of the jackpot and small hit variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 50 (b), the total value of the execution ratio of the “development notice D1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to protrude during the operation valid period is The first rendering button 18A is set to be higher than the total value of the execution ratio of the “development notice D2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the operation validity period.
On the other hand, in all of the losing variation effect patterns shown in FIG. 50 (a), the operation value is larger than the total value of the execution ratio of the “development notice D1” in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to protrude during the operation effective period. The total value of the execution ratio of the “development notice D2” in which the first effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state during the effective period is set higher.
That is, in the variable effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination being a big hit, the operation on the first effect button 18A in the protruding state is performed more than the advance notice performed by the operation on the first effect button 18A in the non-protruding state. The execution notice is set higher in the execution notice.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the “character announcement D” during the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern D019” for the “first jackpot” and the “variation effect pattern D028” for the “second jackpot”, , The execution ratio of “character announcement D1” is the highest, and the execution ratio gradually decreases in the order of “character announcement D2” and “character announcement D3”.
On the other hand, in the “character announcement D” during the variation production of the “variation production pattern D010” for “losing” corresponding to the variation production of the “variation production pattern D019” and “variation production pattern D028”, the “character announcement D1” The execution ratio is the lowest, and the execution ratio gradually increases in the order of “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.
That is, in the “character announcement D”, the reliability of the jackpot is highest in the “character announcement D1”, and gradually decreases in the order of the “character announcement D2” and the “character announcement D3”.

  Also, in comparison with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern D001”, “variation effect pattern D013” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern D022” for “first big hit”, and “ Also in the “fluctuation effect pattern D031” for “the second big hit”, the execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is set as shown in FIG. 66 (b).

  Furthermore, in comparison with the execution ratio set in the above-mentioned “variation effect pattern D001”, “variation effect pattern D016” for “losing”, “variation effect pattern D025” for “first big hit”, and “ As shown in FIG. 66 (c), the execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is also set in “floating effect pattern D034” for “second big hit”.

  Then, as can be seen from the determination value (execution ratio) of the special figure change pattern of the first big hit of the stop symbol data “10H” and “20H” shown in the special figure change pattern determination table of FIG. , The reliability of the jackpot is gradually increased in the order of “variable effect pattern D019”, “variable effect pattern D022”, and “variable effect pattern D025”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, in the “character announcement D”, the “variation effect pattern D019”, the “variation effect pattern D022”, and the “variation effect pattern D025” gradually increase in reliability. ("Character notice D1") is high.

  Similarly, as can be seen from the determination value (execution ratio) of the second big hit special figure change pattern of the stop symbol data “11H” and “21H” shown in the special figure change pattern determination table of FIG. The reliability for the jackpot is gradually increasing in the order of “variable effect pattern D028”, “variable effect pattern D031”, and “variable effect pattern D034”. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, in the “character announcement D”, the “variation effect pattern D028”, the “variation effect pattern D031”, and the “variation effect pattern D034” gradually increase in reliability. ("Character notice D1") is high.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, in any of the variable effect pattern for “losing”, the variable effect pattern for “first big hit”, and the variable effect pattern for “second big hit”. The "determined effect D1" in which the first effect button 18A is controlled to be in the protruding state during the operation effective period is executed at a higher rate than the "determined effect D2" in which the operation effective period is not set. D1 ”and“ determined effect D2 ”are set.

As described above, in the variable effects in the effect modes A to D, the sub CPU 102a does not protrude the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification for urging the player to operate the first effect button 18A is provided. A state (first state) or a protruding state (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A to a non-projecting state (first state) during an operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification for urging the player to operate the first effect button 18A is not performed, and The state (second state) is not set.

  The special effect performed during the fluctuation effect includes a special effect for executing the corresponding effect based on the operation of the first effect button 18A. (State 1) by operating the first effect button 18A, and the corresponding effect of "serif notice" and the effect of "character notice", and the operation by operating the first effect button 18A in the protruding state (second state). The corresponding effect of “decision effect” (second effect) and the response of “development notice” executed by operating the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state (first state) or the projecting state (second state) Direction and is included.

  In addition, in the development notice (third effect) in the variable effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination being determined to be a jackpot, as can be seen from FIGS. 44, 46, 48, and 50, The sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A to the protruding state (the second state) at a higher rate than the non-projecting state (the first state).

  In addition, as described above, in the specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine Y performs the variable rendering of the rendering modes B to D, and the rendering mode B In the variable production (the 31st to 74th variation), the operation effective period is set during the variation production at a higher rate than the variation production (the first to 30th variation), and the variation of the production mode C is changed. The operation validity period is set at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (the 75th to 84th fluctuation) in the effect mode D than in the effect.

  Then, the first effect button 18A protrudes during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate in the fluctuation effect (31st to 74th fluctuation) in the effect mode C than in the fluctuation effect (1st to 30th fluctuation) in the effect mode B. The operation validity period to be set to the state (second state) is set, and the fluctuation production in the production mode D (the 75th to 84th fluctuation) is performed at a higher rate during the fluctuation production than the fluctuation production in the production mode C. An operation effective period for setting one effect button 18A to a protruding state is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the operation valid period, the first effect button 18A as the “first operation means” is set to the “first state”, the “non-projecting state”, and the “second state”. In the above, an example in which a “projecting state” is set has been described. However, the “first state” and the “second state”, which are the states of the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period, are not limited to the example in which the position of the first effect button 18A is different as described above. Any state of the first effect button 18A may be different between the “first state” of the first effect button 18A and the “second state”.

For example, the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is a non-operation state of the first effect button 18A, and the “second state” of the first effect button 18A is an operation state of the first effect button 18A. There may be.
In this case, for example, the first effect button 18A has a structure capable of performing a vibration operation, and the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is a “non-vibration state” in which the first effect button 18A does not vibrate. The "second state" of the first effect button 18A may be a "vibration state" in which the first effect button 18A vibrates.
Also, for example, the housing of the first effect button 18A has a structure capable of rotating operation, and the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is the “non-rotating state” of the housing, The “second state” of the first effect button 18A may be the “rotation state” of the housing.
Also, for example, the first effect button 18A has a structure in which a rotating body capable of rotating operation is provided inside the housing, and the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is “non-rotating” of the rotating body. "State", and the "second state" of the first effect button 18A may be the "rotation state" of the rotating body.

Further, for example, the light emitting state of the internal LED may be different between the “first state” and the “second state” of the first effect button 18A.
In this case, for example, the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is a “non-lighting state” in which the LED incorporated in the first effect button 18A does not emit light due to no light emission, and the first effect button 18A The “second state” may be a “lighting state” in which light is emitted and lighted.
Also, for example, the first effect button 18A has a structure in which the first effect button 18A can be lit in a plurality of different colors depending on the emission color of the internal LED, and the first effect button 18A has a “first state” and a “second state”. The first effect button 18A may be illuminated in a different color, and the “first state” of the first effect button 18A is a “state in which the first effect button 18A illuminates in blue”, and “ The "second state" may be a state in which the first effect button 18A is "lit in red". Note that the lighting color of the first effect button 18A is not limited to this.

  Further, as the “first operation means”, a second effect button 19A may be applied instead of the first effect button 18A. Also in this case, any state of the second effect button 19A may be different between the “first state” of the second effect button 19A and the “second state”.

For example, the “first state” of the second effect button 19A is a non-operating state of the second effect button 19A, and the “second state” of the first effect button 19A is an operating state of the second effect button 19A. There may be.
In this case, for example, the first effect button 19A has a structure capable of vibrating operation, and the “first state” of the second effect button 19A is a “non-vibration state” in which the second effect button 19A does not vibrate. The "second state" of the second effect button 19A may be a "vibration state" in which the second effect button 19A vibrates.

Further, for example, the light emitting state of the internal LED may be different between the “first state” and the “second state” of the second effect button 19A.
In this case, for example, the “first state” of the second effect button 19A is a “non-lighting state” in which the LED included in the second effect button 19A does not emit light because the LED built therein does not emit light, and the first effect button 19A The “second state” may be a “lighting state” in which light is emitted and lighted.
Also, for example, the second effect button 19A has a structure capable of lighting in a plurality of different colors depending on the emission color of the internal LED, and the "first state" and the "second state" of the second effect button 19A. The second production button 19A may be lit in a different color, and the “first state” of the second production button 19A may be a “state that the second production button 19A illuminates in blue”, and the “first state” of the second production button 19A The "second state" may be a state in which the second effect button 19A is "lit in red". It should be noted that the lighting color of the second effect button 19A is not limited to this.

  Further, for example, the “first operation means” may be another operation means different from the first effect button 18A and the second effect button 19A.

  For example, the gaming machine Y is provided with an operation lever (not shown) that can be tilted to the near side, the back side, the left side, and the right side, and this operation lever is applied as “first operation means”. Is also good.

  In this case, the operation lever may be located at different positions in the “first state” and the “second state”. For example, the “first state” of the operation lever is a “non-tilted state” in which the operation lever is not inclined, and the “second state” of the operation lever is such that the operation lever is in the near side, the back side, the left side, It may be in an "inclination state" inclined in any direction on the right side. Further, for example, the “first state” of the operation lever is a “first inclined state” in which the operation lever is inclined in any one of the near side, the back side, the left side, and the right side, and the “first state” of the operation lever is The “state 2” may be a “second tilt state” in which the operation lever is tilted in any direction different from the “first tilt state”.

  Further, for example, the operation lever has a structure capable of vibrating, the “first state” of the operation lever is “non-vibration state” of the operation lever, and the “second state” of the operation lever is May be the “vibration state”.

(2nd Embodiment)
In the above-described first embodiment, an example has been described in which the state of the operation unit that makes the operation valid during the operation valid period during the special effect is set to the “first state” or the “second state”.
In the second embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, also referred to as “second embodiment”), the operation means for validating the operation during the operation valid period during the special effect is referred to as “first effect button 18A” or “second effect. An example in which the button 19A is set will be described.
That is, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 102a sets the special effect information in the special effect information table stored in the sub ROM, instead of the setting content “set the operation means to the first state”, The setting content "select the first effect button 18A as the operating means for validating the operation" is provided, and instead of the setting content "setting the operating means to the second state", "validating the operation" Select the first effect button 18A as the operating means. "
In this case, regardless of which one of the first effect button 18A and the second effect button 19A is valid during the operation validity period, the state is maintained as the "first state".

  FIG. 67 is a special effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode A in the second embodiment. The special effect information table of FIG. 67 is a table used in place of the special effect information table of FIG. 45 in the first embodiment, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 67 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b). If the operation validity period is associated with the type of the special effect, the operation type determination table shown in FIGS. 68A and 68B stored in the sub ROM 102b is used. Then, the type of the designated operation for the operation means that is valid during the operation validity period is determined.
Fig. 67 (a) is a "line announcement A information table" that stores the settings for each type of "line announcement A" in effect mode A. FIG. 67 (b) is a “character notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. 67 (c) is a “development notice A information table” that stores the settings for each type of “development notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 67D is a “determined effect A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect A” in the effect mode A.

"Serif notice A1" is for displaying an effect image of "serif a1" such as "Getting rich!" On the image display device 14. FIG. In the "line notice A1", the first effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and the operation valid period for which the operation of the first effect button 18A is valid (for example, as described later) During the operation effective period X ₁₁ ), the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the first effect button 18A is executed (the state of the first effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state). Then, based on the fact that a designation operation is performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period, an effect in which “character a1” to be described later says “I'm getting rich!” As “line a1”. Displaying an image (see (a-1-3) in FIG. 53) on the image display device 14, and moving the third decorative member 17C as a movable member from the "standby position 3" to the "operating position 3". The corresponding effect of is executed.

  "Serif notice A2" displays the effect image of "serif a2" of "Have a hundred cars?" On the image display device 14, and the effect contents are the same as "serif notice A1" except that the movable member is not operated. is there.

  "Serif notice A3" displays an effect image of "serif a3" of "Are you getting ten cars?" On the image display device 14, and the effect contents are the same as "serif notice A1" except that the movable member is not operated. is there.

  "Serif notice A4" does not set the operation validity period, and displays the effect image of "serif a4", "Which one is acquired?" On the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, and does not operate the movable member. Is the same as "Serial notice A1" in the effect contents.

  "Serif notice A5" is for displaying an effect image of "Serif a5" of "Will you get money?" On the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and does not operate the movable member. Is the same as "Serial notice A1" in the effect contents.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in the “serif notice A”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “serif notice A1” to “serif notice A5” is the highest in the “serif notice A1”. The execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” is set in “Serif notice A” so as to be lower as “Serif notice A2” to “Serif notice A5”.

“Character notice A1” is for displaying an effect image of “character a2-1” on the image display device 14. This "character announcement A1", the first performance button 18A as an operation means for operating the operating lifetime is valid are those that are selected, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime Y ₁₁ described _later), the operation promoting The notification is not executed (the state of the first effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state). Then, based on the designation operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect image (see (a-2-3) in FIG. 53) of “character a2-1” described later is displayed. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the display device 14 is executed.

  “Character notice A2” is the same as “Character a2-1” except that the effect image of “Character a2-2” (see (b-2-3) in FIG. 54) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-1”. The effect content is the same as the character notice A1.

  “Character notice A3” is the same as “Character a2-1” except that the effect image of “Character a2-3” (see (c-2-3) in FIG. 55) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-1”. The effect content is the same as the character notice A1.

  “Character notice A4” does not set the operation validity period, and at a predetermined timing, instead of “character a2-1”, the effect image of “character notice a2-4” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as the “character notice A1”.

  “Character notice A5” does not set the operation validity period, and at a predetermined timing, renders an effect image of “character notice a2-5” (not shown) instead of “character a2-1” on the image display device 14. Except for the display, the effect contents are the same as the “character notice A1”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), in the “character announcement A”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “character announcement A1” to “character announcement A5” is “character announcement A1” most. The execution ratio of “character announcement A1” to “character announcement A5” is set so as to be higher and lower as “character announcement A2” to “character announcement A5”.

The “advance notice A1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect a1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice A1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and the operation valid period (for example, described later) in which the operation of the second effect button 19A is valid. During the operation validity period X ₁₂ ), an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the second effect button 19A is executed. Then, the effect image of “effect a1” (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 53) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the designation operation performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period. A corresponding effect of displaying and moving the second decorative member 17B as the movable member from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2” is executed.

  “Development notice A2” is the same as “development notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) is displayed on image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”.

  "Development notice A3" is an effect image of "effect a3" (not shown) displayed on the image display device 14 in place of "effect a1" and produced as "advance notice A1" except that the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

  The effect of the “advance notice A4” is the same as that of the “advance notice A1”, except that the operation on the first effect button 18A is enabled during the operation validity period.

  The “expansion notice A5” validates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, and displays an effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”. Except that the movable member is not operated, the effect is the same as that of the “advance notice A1”.

  The “expansion notice A6” validates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, and displays an effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”. Except that the movable member is not operated, the effect is the same as that of the “advance notice A1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b) above, in the “development notice A”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is most likely to be “development notice A1”. The execution ratios of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” are set so as to be higher and become lower as “development notice A2” to “development notice A6”.
In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), the second effect button 19A is enabled at a high rate during the operation validity period in the variable effect that evolves from “super reach” to “special reach”. In the variable production that does not evolve from “super reach” to “special reach”, the execution ratio of “expansion announcement A1” to “expansion announcement A6” is set so that the first production button 18A is activated at a high rate during the operation valid period. Is set.

“Determined effect A1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and display an effect image of “flash a1” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 54). ). In the “determined effect A1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period, and the operation effect period (for example, described later) in which the operation on the second effect button 19A is effective. operation in lifetime X ₂₂₎ of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A is executed. Then, based on the designation operation performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation validity period, the effect image of “flash a1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved to the “standby position”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect A2” displays an effect image of “flash a1” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and sets the first decorative member 17A as the movable member to the “standby position 1”. "Is moved to" operation position 1-2 ".

The sub CPU 102a thus selects an operation unit to be valid during the operation valid period, and determines an operation type for the selected operation unit based on the operation type determination table of the effect mode A shown in FIG.
FIG. 68A is an operation type determination table in the loss effect variation effect pattern in the effect mode A. Further, FIG. 68 (b) is an operation type determination table in the fluctuation effect pattern for the big hit and the small hit in the effect mode A.

For example, in a case where the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and the “fluctuation effect pattern A022” is determined, during the operation effective period of “line notice A” and “character notice A”, the first effect button 18A "Single hit" is valid at a rate of 60%, and "continuous hit" is valid at a rate of 40%.
Note that “single-hit” means one pressing operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, and “continuous hit” means two or more pressing operations on the second effect button 19A. Note that “continuous hitting” may be performed by performing a predetermined number of pressing operations of the second effect button 19A at least three times or more.

  In addition, in the operation validity period of the “advance notice A” when the “fluctuating effect pattern A022” is determined, when the first effect button 18A is selected, “single hit” is enabled at a rate of 60%, and 40%. In the case where the second effect button 19A is selected, "single hit" is enabled at a rate of 40% and "continuous hit" is enabled at a rate of 60%.

  Also, in the operation valid period of the “determined effect A” when the “fluctuating effect pattern A026” is determined, “single-hit” is enabled at a rate of 30% with respect to the second effect button 19A, and a rate of 70% To enable "repeated hits".

  Also, for example, when the "variable effect pattern A034" is determined at the time of winning the first jackpot, during the operation effective period of "line notice A" and "character notice A", the first effect button 18A is Only "single hit" is valid.

  In addition, in the operation effective period of “development notice A” when the “fluctuating effect pattern A034” is determined, when the first effect button 18A is selected, only “single hit” is valid, and the second effect button 19A When is selected, only "continuous hit" is valid.

  In addition, in the operation valid period of the “determined effect A” when the “fluctuating effect pattern A038” is determined, only the “continuous hit” for the second effect button 19A is valid.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when “single-hit” is enabled for the first effect button 18A, the sub CPU 102a executes an operation promotion notification for prompting “single-hit” for the first effect button 18A, When "continuous hit" is enabled for the first effect button 18A, an operation promotion notification for prompting "continuous hit" for the first effect button 18A is executed, and "single hit" is enabled for the second effect button 19A. If so, an operation prompt for prompting a “single-stroke” to the second effect button 19A is executed, and “continuous-strike” to the second effect button 19A is enabled when the “continuous hit” to the second effect button 19A is enabled. The effect control is performed so as to execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the user.

  Therefore, the ratio (%) of “single-stroke” valid for the first effect button 18A shown in FIG. 68, FIG. 70, FIG. 72, and FIG. The ratio (%) that corresponds to the ratio (%) of prompting “single hit” and the ratio (%) of validating “continuous hit” for the first effect button 18A is the ratio (%) of prompting “continuous hit” for the first effect button 18A in the operation promotion notification. %), And the ratio (%) of validating “single hit” for the second effect button 19A corresponds to the ratio (%) of prompting “single hit” for the second effect button 19A in the operation promotion notification. The rate (%) at which “continuous tapping” is valid for the second effect button 19A corresponds to the rate (%) at which “continuous tapping” to the second effect button 19A is promoted in the operation promotion notification.

  As described above, the special effect includes the special effect of executing the corresponding effect based on the operation of the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A, and the corresponding effect includes the first effect. "Serial notice" and "character notice" executed based on the operation on the button 18A, "decision effect" executed based on the operation on the second effect button 19A, and "decision effect" executed on the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A "Development notice" executed by the operation is included.

  And in the advance notice (third effect) of the variable effect performed based on the result of the jackpot determination being determined to be a big hit, as can be seen from FIGS. 44, 46, 48, and 50. The sub CPU 102a selects the second effect button 19A at a higher rate than the first effect button 18A.

In addition, as described above, the sub CPU 102a performs the first effect button 18A as an operation on the first effect button 18A in the operation prompt effect to perform the operation prompt notification for prompting the operation of the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A in the variable effect. The user is prompted to perform “single-hit” as the operation of the operation type or “continuous hit” as the operation of the second operation type. Further, as the operation for the second effect button 19A, the user is prompted to perform a single operation, which is an operation of the third operation type, or a continuous operation, which is an operation of the fourth operation type.
Then, the sub CPU 102a makes the ratio of prompting the operation of the first operation type different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the second operation type. In addition, the sub CPU 102a makes the rate at which the operation of the third operation type is urged different from the rate at which the operation of the fourth operation type is urged.

  In this operation promoting effect, only the operation of the first operation type is prompted as the operation on the first effect button 18A (100% “single hit”), and only the operation of the fourth operation type is operated as the operation on the second effect button 19A. There is an operation promotion effect that prompts (100% "continuous hit").

The operations of the first to fourth operation types are not limited to this, and the operations of the first operation type and the operations of the second operation type are different, and the operations of the third operation type and the operations of the fourth operation type are different. May be any operation as long as is different.
For example, “single hit” may be replaced by “continuous hit”, and “long hit” may be replaced by “long press”. This “long press” refers to, for example, a pressing operation that continues to press “for at least three seconds” on the operation means (the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A) for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period. The pressing time in the “long press” is not limited to “3 seconds or more”, and may be any pressing time.

  FIG. 69 is a special effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B in the second embodiment. The special effect information table of FIG. 69 is a table used in place of the special effect information table of FIG. 47, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 69 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). If the operation validity period is associated with the type of the special effect, the operation type determination table shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B stored in the sub ROM 102b is used. Then, the type of the designated operation for the operation means that is valid during the operation valid period is determined.
FIG. 69A is a “development notice B information table” that stores the settings for each type of “development notice B” in the effect mode B. FIG. 69 (b) is a “determined effect B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect B” in the effect mode B.

The “advance notice B1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect b1” on the image display device 14. In this “development notice B1”, an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X ₄₁ described later) for validating the operation of the second effect button 19A is set, and the operation of the second effect button 19A is performed during the operation valid period. An operation prompting prompt is executed. Then, the effect image of “effect b1” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 58) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the designation operation performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation valid period. A corresponding effect such as displaying is performed.

  The “development notice B2” enables the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period, and displays an effect image of “effect b2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect d1”. Except for the above, the production contents are the same as the “advance notice B1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the “development notice B”, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is “development notice B1”. The execution ratios of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” are set to be higher than “development notice B2”.
Further, in the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, in the fluctuation effect that evolves from “symbol fluctuation” to “special character reach”, the second effect button 19A is operated at a high rate during the operation valid period. In the variable production that is valid and does not develop from “design fluctuation” to “special character reach”, the “first development button B1” and “new development notice B2” are set so that the first production button 18A is valid at a high rate during the operation validity period. Is set.

“Determined effect B1” is a process of moving the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displaying an effect image of “flash b1” on the image display device 14 as “determined effect” ((e in FIG. 59). -3-3)). This "decided effect B1", which second performance button 19A is selected as an operation means operated in the operation lifetime is valid, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime X ₅₂ will be described _later), second An operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 19A is executed. Then, based on the designation operation performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved to the “standby position”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “decision effect B2”, the effect image of “flash b2” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and the first decorative member 17A is moved as the movable member to the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in "determined effect B", "determined effect B1" and "determined effect B1" are executed such that "determined effect B1" is executed at a higher ratio than "determined effect B2". B2 "is set.

Then, the sub CPU 102a determines the operation type for the operation means selected in this way based on the operation type determination table of the effect mode B shown in FIG.
FIG. 70A is an operation type determination table in the loss effect variation effect pattern in the effect mode B. FIG. 70 (b) is an operation type determination table in the variation mode for large hits and small hits in the effect mode B.

  For example, in the operation effective period of “development notice B” when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and the “fluctuating effect pattern B013” is determined, when the first effect button 18A is selected, 70 Percentage of "Single" is valid at a rate of 30%, "Continuous" is valid at a rate of 30%, and when the second production button is selected, "Single" is valid at a rate of 30%, and a rate of 70% To enable "repeated hits".

  In addition, for example, in the operation effective period of the “development notice B” when the “variation effect pattern B019” is determined when the first jackpot is won, “single hit” when the first effect button 18A is selected. Only the second effect button 19A is selected, and only the "continuous hit" is enabled.

  In addition, during the operation effective period of the “development notice B” when the “variable effect pattern B021” is determined when the first jackpot is won, at a rate of 80% when the first effect button 18A is selected. "Single hit" is made effective, "strike" is made effective at a rate of 20%, and when the second effect button 19A is selected, "single strike" is made effective at a rate of 20%, and "strike" is made at a rate of 80%. Is valid. In addition, in the operation valid period of the “determined effect B” when the “fluctuating effect pattern B021” is determined, the “single-hit” is enabled at a rate of 20% with respect to the second effect button 19A, and the rate of 80% To enable "repeated hits".

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode C, and is stored in the sub-ROM 102b. FIG. 71A is a diagram showing a “development notice C information table” that stores the setting contents of each type of “development notice C” in the effect mode C. FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing a “determined effect C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect C” in the effect mode C.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 42, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 71 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b). When the special effect type is associated with the operation validity period, the operation ratio is determined by the operation type determination tables shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B stored in the sub ROM 102b. Then, the type of the designated operation for the operation means that is valid during the operation valid period is determined.

The “advance notice C1” is for displaying an effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 62) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice C1”, an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X ₇₁ described later) for validating the operation of the second effect button 19A is set, and during the operation valid period, the operation of the second effect button 19A is set. An operation prompting prompt is executed. Then, based on the designation operation performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation validity period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect c1” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The “advance notice C2” validates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, and displays an effect image of “effect c2” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect c1”. Except for the above, the effect contents are the same as the “advance notice C1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in the “expansion notice C”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” is “development notice C1”. The execution ratios of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” are set so as to be higher than “development notice C2”.
In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the second effect button 19A is activated at a high rate during the operation validity period in the variable effect that evolves from “symbol change” to “attack reach”, and the “symbol” The execution ratios of the “advance notice C1” and the “advance notice C2” are set so that the first effect button 18A is activated at a high rate during the operation valid period in the fluctuation effect that does not develop from “fluctuation” to “attack reach”. Have been.

The “determined effect C1” is to move the first decorative member 17A of the movable member and display the effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 (see FIG. 62 (g-3-3)). In this “decided effect C1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X ₇₂ described later) is set. During the operation validity period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the second effect button 19A is executed. Then, based on the designation operation performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved to the “standby position”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the “determination effect C2”, an effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and the first decorative member 17A is moved as the movable member to the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in the “determined effect C”, the “determined effect C1”, the “determined effect C1”, and the “determined effect C1” are executed such that the “determined effect C1” is executed at a higher ratio than the “determined effect C2”. The execution ratio of "determined effect C2" is set.

Then, the sub CPU 102a determines the operation type for the selected operating means based on the operation type determination table of the effect mode C shown in FIG.
FIG. 72A is an operation type determination table in the loss effect variation effect pattern in the effect mode C. FIG. 72 (b) is an operation type determination table in the variation mode for large hits and small hits in the effect mode C.

  For example, during the operation effective period of “development notice C” when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and “variable effect pattern C013” is determined, if the first effect button 18A is selected, 70 Percentage of "Single" is valid at a rate of 30%, "Continuous" is valid at a rate of 30%, and when the second production button is selected, "Single" is valid at a rate of 30%, and a rate of 70% To enable "repeated hits".

  In addition, for example, in the operation validity period of “development notice C” when the “variable effect pattern C019” is determined when the first jackpot is won, “single hit” is performed when the first effect button 18A is selected. Only the second effect button 19A is selected, and only the "continuous hit" is enabled.

  In addition, during the operation effective period of “development notice C” when the “variable effect pattern C021” is determined when the first jackpot is won, at a rate of 80% when the first effect button 18A is selected. "Single hit" is made effective, "strike" is made effective at a rate of 20%, and when the second effect button 19A is selected, "single strike" is made effective at a rate of 20%, and "strike" is made at a rate of 80%. Is valid. In addition, in the operation valid period of the “determined effect C” when the “fluctuating effect pattern C021” is determined, the “single-hit” is enabled at a rate of 20% with respect to the second effect button 19A, and the rate of 80% To enable "repeated hits".

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b. FIG. 73A is a diagram illustrating a “development notice D information table” that stores the setting contents of each type of “development notice D” in the effect mode D. FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing a “determined effect D information table” that stores the setting content for each type of “determined effect D” in the effect mode D.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern using the variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 43, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table in FIG. 73 is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b). When the special effect type is associated with the operation validity period, the operation ratio is determined by the operation type determination tables shown in FIGS. 74A and 74B stored in the sub ROM 102b. Then, the type of the designated operation for the operation means that is valid during the operation valid period is determined.

The “development notice D1” is for displaying the effect image of the “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 65) on the image display device 14. In this “development notice D1”, an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X ₁₀₁ described later) for validating the operation of the second effect button 19A is set, and during the operation valid period, the operation of the second effect button 19A is set. An operation prompting prompt is executed. Then, based on the designation operation performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation validity period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect d1” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the “development notice D2”, the operation on the first effect button 18A is enabled during the operation validity period, and an effect image of “effect d2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect d1”. Other than the above, the production contents are the same as the “advance notice D1”.

In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “development notice D”, the degree of expectation (reliability) to the jackpot of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is “development notice D1”. The execution ratios of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” are set to be higher than “development notice D2”.
In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the second effect button 19A becomes effective at a high rate during the operation validity period in the fluctuation effect that evolves from “symbol fluctuation” to “Janken reach”, The execution ratio of the “advance notice D1” and “advance notice D2” is set so that the first effect button 18A is activated at a high rate during the operation validity period in the variable effect that does not develop from “variation” to “Janken reach”. Have been.

“Character notice D1” is for displaying the effect image of “character d1” on the image display device 14. This "character announcement D1", the first performance button 18A as an operation means for operating the operating lifetime is valid are those that are selected, the operation lifetime (e.g. operating lifetime Y ₁₀₁ will be described _later), the operation promoting No notification is performed. Then, based on the designation operation performed on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period, an effect image of “character d1” described later (see (j-4-2) in FIG. 65) is displayed on the image display device. 14 is displayed.

  “Character notice D2” is the same as “character notice D1” except that an effect image of “character d2” (not shown) is displayed on image display device 14 instead of “character d1”.

  "Character notice D3" is the same as "character notice D1" except that an effect image of "character d3" (not shown) is displayed on image display device 14 instead of "character d1".

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is the highest in “character notice D1”. The execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is set so as to be lower as “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.

"Determined effect D1" is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and to display an effect image of "flash d1" on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-4) in FIG. 65). ). In the “determined effect D1”, the second effect button 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period, and the operation effect period (for example, described later) in which the operation on the second effect button 19A is effective. During the operation validity period X ₁₀₂ ), operation promotion notification for prompting operation of the second effect button 19A is executed. Then, based on the designation operation performed on the second effect button 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of “flash d1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved to the “standby position”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  The “decision effect D2” displays the effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing without setting the operation validity period, and sets the first decorative member 17A as the movable member to the “standby position 1”. ”Is moved to“ operation position 1-2 ”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “determined effect D”, the “determined effect D1”, the “determined effect D1”, the “determined effect D1”, and the “determined effect D1” are executed at a higher rate than the “determined effect D2”. The execution ratio of "fixed effect D2" is set.

Then, the sub CPU 102a determines the operation type for the selected operating means based on the operation type determination table of the effect mode D shown in FIG.
FIG. 74A is an operation type determination table in the loss effect variation effect pattern in the effect mode D. FIG. 74 (b) is an operation type determination table in the variation mode for large hits and small hits in the effect mode D.

  For example, in the operation effective period of “development notice D” when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and the “variation effect pattern D010” is determined, when the first effect button 18A is selected, 70 Percentage of "Single" is valid at a rate of 30%, "Continuous" is valid at a rate of 30%, and when the second production button is selected, "Single" is valid at a rate of 30%, and a rate of 70% To enable "repeated hits".

  Also, during the operation validity period of the “character notice D” when the “fluctuating effect pattern D010” is determined, “single-hit” is enabled at a rate of 70% as an operation on the first effect button 18A, and a rate of 30% To enable "repeated hits".

  In addition, in the operation valid period of the “determined effect D” when the “fluctuating effect pattern D010” is determined, “single-hit” is enabled at a rate of 30% as an operation on the second effect button 19A, and a rate of 70% To enable "repeated hits".

  In addition, for example, in the operation effective period of the “development notice D” when the “variable effect pattern D019” is determined when the first jackpot is won, “single hit” is performed when the first effect button 18A is selected. Only the second effect button 19A is selected, and only the "continuous hit" is enabled. In addition, in the operation valid period of the “character notice D” in the case where the “fluctuating effect pattern D019” is determined, only “single hit” is valid as the operation on the first effect button 18A. In addition, in the operation valid period of the “determined effect D” when the “fluctuating effect pattern D019” is determined, only “continuous hit” is enabled as an operation on the second effect button 19A.

In addition, during the operation effective period of the “development notice D” when the “variable effect pattern D022” is determined when the first jackpot is won, at a rate of 80% when the first effect button 18A is selected. "Single hit" is made effective, "strike" is made effective at a rate of 20%, and when the second effect button 19A is selected, "single strike" is made effective at a rate of 20%, and "strike" is made at a rate of 80%. Is valid.
In addition, during the operation validity period of the “character notice D” when the “fluctuating effect pattern D022” is determined, “single-hit” is enabled at a rate of 80% with respect to the first effect button 18A, and a rate of 20% To enable "repeated hits". In addition, during the operation valid period of the “determined effect D” when the “fluctuating effect pattern D022” is determined, “single-hit” is enabled at a rate of 20% with respect to the second effect button 19A, and a rate of 80% To enable "repeated hits".

(Effect input control processing by the effect control board in the second embodiment)
The effect input control processing by the effect control board 102 performed in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a determines the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 based on the pressing operation of the first effect button 18A, and the second effect button operation based on the operation of the second effect button 19A. By determining whether or not any of the second effect button operation detection signals from the detection switch 19a has been input, it is determined whether or not any of these operation means has been operated.

  In this step S1401, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1402 when determining that an operation has been performed on any of the operation means, and proceeds to step S1402 when determining that no operation has been performed on any of the operation means. The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol is currently being changed and displayed, and if it is determined that the special symbol is being changed and displayed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1403 to change the special symbol. If it is determined that it is not being displayed, the process moves to step S1407.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a confirms the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed according to the current variation display of the special symbol stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation is valid during the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern confirmed in step S1403, and if it is determined that the operation is valid, the process proceeds to step S1405. Then, if it is determined that the operation is not in the validity period, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1405, during the operation validity period determined in step S1404, the sub CPU 102a designates the operation means (the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A) activated in the operation validity period (the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A). It is determined whether "single hit" or "continuous hit" has been performed.

  In this step S1405, the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation means activated during the operation validity period is the first effect button 18A and that the designation operation is "single hit". By inputting the first effect button operation detection signal once, it is determined that a designation operation has been performed on the operation means that has been activated during the operation effective period. On the other hand, by determining that the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 has not been input once, the designation operation to the operation means activated during the operation effective period is performed. Judge that it is not done.

  In addition, in this step S1405, when the operation means activated during the operation validity period is the first effect button 18A and the designated operation is "continuous hit", the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button operation detection switch By inputting the first effect button operation detection signal twice from 18a11, it is determined that the designation operation has been performed on the operation means activated during the operation effective period. On the other hand, since the first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 has not been input twice, no designation operation has been performed on the operating means that has been activated during the operation effective period. Judge.

  In step S1405, when the operation means activated during the operation valid period is the second effect button 19A and the designation operation is "single hit", the sub CPU 102a determines whether the second effect button operation detection switch By inputting the second effect button operation detection signal from 19a once, it is determined that a designation operation has been performed on the operation means activated during the operation effective period. On the other hand, since the second effect button operation detection signal from the second effect button operation detection switch 19a has not been input once, no designation operation has been performed on the operation means that has been activated during the operation effective period. Judge.

  In step S1405, when the operation means activated during the operation validity period is the second effect button 19A and the designated operation is "continuous hit", the sub CPU 102a sets the second effect button operation detection switch By inputting the second effect button operation detection signal from 19a twice, it is determined that a designation operation has been performed on the operation means that has been activated during the operation effective period. On the other hand, since the second effect button operation detection signal from the second effect button operation detection switch 19a has not been input twice, no designation operation has been performed on the operation means that has been activated during the operation effective period. Judge.

  In this step S1405, when the designated operation is “continuous tapping”, the sub CPU 102a detects a detection signal (a first effect button operation detection signal or a second effect button operation detection signal) indicating that a pressed operation of the activated operating means has been detected. Each time the effect button operation detection signal is input, a press operation effect designation command for designating the effect content according to the press operation is transmitted to the image control board 105. When receiving the pressing operation effect designation command from the effect control substrate 102, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display an effect image corresponding to the pressing operation.

  In step S1405, if the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1405 that a designation operation has been performed on an operation unit whose operation has been validated during the operation valid period, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1406. If it is determined that the designation operation has not been performed on the activated operation means, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, a corresponding effect control command for controlling a corresponding effect based on a designation operation to the operation means whose operation is enabled during the operation valid period. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing of step S1500. Then, when receiving the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

  For example, in step S1403, when the sub CPU 102a confirms the “variable effect pattern A034” as the variable effect pattern and executes the “line notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a transmits the corresponding effect control command to the image control board 105 and The signal is transmitted to the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the image control board 105 performs control to display an effect image of “line a1” as the corresponding effect. In addition, the lamp control board 104 controls the drive to the third effect accessory device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operation” as the corresponding effect. The moving operation for moving to position 3 ”is performed.

  In step S1407, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a floating effect performed during the change of the special symbol, a game effect related to a game such as a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game is not being performed, and If it is determined that the game is waiting, the process proceeds to step S1408, and if it is determined that the game is not waiting, the effect input control process ends.

  In step S1408, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation is in effect during the game standby mode, in which the operation of the first effect button 18A as the operation unit is valid, and determines that the operation is in effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1409, and if it is determined that the operation is not in the effective period, the effect input control process ends.

In step S1409, during the operation valid period determined in step S1408, the sub CPU 102a performs a single hit (1 in the operation valid period) which is a designation operation on the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means whose operation is enabled. Is determined.
In this step S1409, when the sub CPU 102a determines that a single hit, which is a designation operation on the first effect button 18A, which is the operation means whose operation is validated, is performed during the operation validity period determined in step S1408. In step S1410, the process proceeds to step S1410, and if it is determined that the single hit on the first effect button 18A has not been performed, the effect input control process ends.

Note that the sub CPU 102a performs an operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to perform an operation is not performed in a game effect related to a game using a game ball such as a variable effect performed during the variable display of a special symbol. Only the first effect button 18A is enabled, and the operation of the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A is enabled during the operation effective period for performing the operation promotion notification.
Further, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation on the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period in the standby state.
On the other hand, during the operation valid period during the standby state, the sub CPU 102a restricts the validity of the operation on the second effect button 19A. However, during the display of the menu screen in the standby state, the sub CPU 102a releases the restriction on the operation of the second effect button 19A.

  Hereinafter, an example will be described in which the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A is enabled during the operation effective period during the variable effect.

(Example of “fluctuation effect pattern A034”)
In the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern A034”, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the sub CPU 102a sets the “serial announcement A” as a special effect in the “symbol fluctuation A1-1” of the period (a-1). At this time, the production control is performed so as to execute any one of “Serial notice A1” to “Serial notice A5” shown in the dialogue notice A information table of FIG. 67 (a).

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 11 (2) of FIG. 53, the operation lifetime _{X 11} to set in the "speech announcement A1" - "speech announcement A3" is set to enable operation of the first performance button 18A ( The 100% first effect button is selected), and the second effect button 19A is not enabled (0% second effect button is selected). (The execution ratio of “line announcement A1” to “line announcement A3” in “fluctuation effect pattern A034” in FIG. 44 (b), see FIG. 67 (a)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A for which the operation is valid based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "line notice A" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern A034" in FIG. Is designated as "single hit" which is a single pressing operation.

The sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime X ₁₁ executes a demonstration for displaying an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification to prompt the designation operation to the first performance button 18A (one-base hit) on the image display device 14. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters "single hit !!" together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge.
In addition, when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A1", based on being the one-base hit for the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11,} "character a1" and "words a1" ( "one The effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53 showing the appearance of “Get rich!” Is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is moved from the “standby position 3” as a movable member. An effect control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (notification effect) such as moving to “operation position 3”. The sub CPU 102a may execute and control an effect of outputting the sound of “line a1” from the sound output device 15.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A2", as shown in FIG. 67 (a), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11,} FIG. 53 Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-3), a corresponding effect in which an effect image in which “character a1” speaks “serif a2” (“acquire one hundred cars?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14. (Preliminary production) is performed.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "dialogue notice A3", as shown in FIG. 67 (a), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 11,} FIG. 53 Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-3), a corresponding effect in which an effect image in which “character a1” speaks “serif a3” (“Do you get ten cars?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14 (advance notice). Control to perform the effect).

On the other hand, sub-CPU102a is, "serif notice A4", if you want to run a "dialogue notice A5", it does not set the operation effective period _{X 11.} That is, in the “line notice A4” and the “line notice A5”, the image of the operation promotion notification such as the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. 53 is not displayed, and the “character” is displayed at a predetermined timing. The effect control is performed so as to execute a notice effect in which an effect image in which “a1” speaks a line is displayed on the image display device 14. Note that the announcement effects of "Serif notice A4" and "Serif notice A5" are effects corresponding to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “line notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a differs from the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 53 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. Is performed on the image display device 14 to display an effect image in which the user speaks “line a4” (“acquire one?”).

  When executing the “line notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a performs “character a1” at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 67A, differently from the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. Performs a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) in which an effect image in which "speaks a5" ("Will you get money?") Is spoken is displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect in “normal reach A1-1”. At this time, “character notice A1” to “character” shown in the character notice A information table of FIG. Control to execute any one of the “notification A5”.

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _Y 11 (2) of FIG. 53, the operation lifetime _{Y 11} of "Character notice A1" - "character notice A3" is the operation of the first performance button 18A and effective (100% The first effect button is selected), and the second effect button 19A is not made effective (the 0% second effect button is selected) ("Character notice A1" in "fluctuating effect pattern A034" in FIG. 44B). -Execution rate of "character notice A3", see FIG. 67 (b)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A for which the operation is valid based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "character notice A" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern A034" in FIG. Is designated as "single hit" which is a single pressing operation.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{Y 11} does not perform the operation promoting notification.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A1", based on being the one-base hit for the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11,} as shown in FIG. 53 (a-2-3) In addition, the image display device 14 performs control for executing a corresponding effect (notification effect) such that a new character “character a2-1” is additionally displayed in addition to the already displayed “character a1”. Do.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character announcement A2", based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11,} in the image display device 14, "Character a2-1" Control to execute a corresponding effect (preliminary effect) such as additionally displaying “character a2-2” different from the above.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character notice A3", based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 11,} in the image display device 14, "Character a2-1" In addition, a control is performed to execute a preview effect (corresponding effect) such as additionally displaying “character a2-3” different from “character a2-2”.

On the other hand, sub-CPU102a is, "Chara notice A4", if you want to run a "character notice A5", do not set the operation effective period _{Y 11.} That is, in the “character notice A4” and the “character notice A5”, a new character is added at a predetermined timing without displaying the operation promotion notification image as shown in (a-2-2) of FIG. Execute the displayed announcement effect. The announcement effects of "character announcement A4" and "character announcement A5" are effects equivalent to the above-described corresponding effects.

  When executing the “character notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a performs a control to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying an effect image to which “character a2-4” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing. I do.

  When executing the “character notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a executes a notice effect (corresponding effect) that displays an effect image to which “character a2-5” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing. I do.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A” in “super reach A1-1”, but at this time, “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” shown in the development notice A information table of FIG. Is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the "development notice A1" as the "development notice A" according to the execution ratio of the "development notice A" in the "variable effect pattern A034" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. To execute any one of the “advance notice A6”.

Sub CPU102a, in "super reach A1-1", in the case of performing any "development notice A1" - "Development notice A3" is also the operation lifetime _{X 12} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A set, in the case of performing any "development notice A4" - "development notice A6" also sets the operating lifetime X ₁₂ to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A (FIG. 67 (c) refer) .

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 21 (2) of FIG. 53, the operation lifetime _{X 12,} and enable the second performance button 19A at a rate of 50% (selected), the first effect at a rate of 50% The button 18A is activated. (Execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “fluctuating effect pattern A034” in FIG. 44B, see FIG. 67C).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “advance notice A” associated with the “fluctuation effect pattern A034” in FIG. In this case, the designation operation on the first effect button 18A is set to “single hit”, which is a single pressing operation, and when the operation of the second effect button 19A is made valid, the designation operation on the second effect button 19A is performed. Is "continuous hit" which is a pressing operation two or more times.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 12} is (a-3-2) of FIG. 53 or in place of the effect image shown in (a-3-3), specifies the operation to the first performance button 18A (one-base hit) The effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the user or an effect image including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting a designation operation (continuous hitting) on the second effect button 19A.
Sub CPU102a is, operation and enable the effective period _{X 12} operation of the second performance button 19A in the "development notice A1" - "development notice A3", "battered case!" Along with the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the notification promotion image composed of the characters On the other hand, the sub CPU102a is operated at effective in the period _{X 12} validates the operation of the first performance button 18A "Development notice A4" - "Development notice A6", whether "one-base hit with the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the notification promotion image composed of the characters “!”.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A1", based on being the battered for a second performance button 19A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} shown in (a-3-4) of FIG. 53 As described above, the second decoration member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2”, and the effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decoration member 17B on the image display device 14. ) Is displayed, and control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) is performed.

Sub CPU102a from when running "development announcement A2", based on being the battered for a second performance button 19A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} a second decorative member 17B "standby position 2 ' In addition to moving to the “operation position 2”, the image display device 14 performs control to execute a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice A3", as shown in FIG. 67 (c), based on the battered is the second performance button 19A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} image display The device 14 performs control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A4", as shown in FIG. 67 (c), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} second The corresponding effect of moving the decoration member 17B from the “standby position 2” to the “operation position 2” and displaying an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decoration member 17B on the image display device 14 ( Control to execute the development notice).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice A5", as shown in FIG. 67 (c), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} image display The device 14 performs control to execute a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a2).

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A6", as shown in FIG. 67 (c), based on the one-base hit is the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{X 12,} image display The device 14 performs control for executing a corresponding effect (advance notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

(Example of "fluctuation effect pattern A038")
In the fluctuation effect of the “variation effect pattern A038”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), performs the “serial announcement A” as a special effect in the “symbol fluctuation A1-1” of the period (b-1). At this time, control is performed to execute any one of “Serial notice A1” to “Serial notice A5” shown in the dialogue notice A information table of FIG. 67 (a).

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 21 (2) of FIG. 54, the operation lifetime _{X 21} to set in the "speech announcement A1" - "speech announcement A3" is set to enable operation of the first performance button 18A ( The 100% first effect button is selected), and the second effect button 19A is not enabled (0% second effect button is selected). (Execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “Variation effect pattern A038” in FIG. 44B, see FIG. 67A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A whose operation is validated based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "line notice A" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern A038" in FIG. Is designated as "single hit" at a rate of 70%, and "consecutive hits" at a rate of 30%.

Sub CPU102a is, if you run a "dialogue notice A1" - "dialogue notice A3", with respect to the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime X _11, in the case of the specified operating the "one-base hit" is "one-base hit" is In the case where "continuous hit" is the designated operation, control is performed to execute the corresponding effects of "serial notice A1" to "serial notice A3" based on the "continuous hit" being performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52B, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect in “normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2). Control is performed to execute any one of "character notice A1" to "character notice A5" shown in the character notice A information table 67 (b).

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _Y 21 (2) of FIG. 54, the operation lifetime _{Y 21} to set the "Character notice A1" - "character notice A3" is set to enable operation of the first performance button 18A ( The 100% first effect button is selected), and the operation of the second effect button 19A is not validated (the 0% second effect button is selected) (see “Variable effect pattern A038” in FIG. 44B). The execution ratio of the character announcement A1 to the character announcement A3 (see FIG. 67 (b)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A for which the operation is validated based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "character announcement A" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern A038" in FIG. Is designated as "single hit" at a rate of 70%, and "consecutive hits" at a rate of 30%.

Sub CPU102a is, if you run a "dialogue notice A1" - "dialogue notice A3", with respect to the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime X _11, in the case of the specified operating the "one-base hit" is "one-base hit" is In the case where "continuous hit" is the designated operation, the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" is executed based on the fact that "continuous hit" is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “determined effect A” in “special reach A1-1”. At this time, “determined effect A1” and “determined effect A2” shown in the determined effect A information table of FIG. 67 (d). Is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect A1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 22} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 67 (d)).

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 22 (2) of FIG. 54, in the operating lifetime _{X 22} in "decided effect A1", select the active and then (100% second performance button operation of the second performance button 19A ), The operation of the first effect button 18A is not validated (0% first effect button is selected) (“decision effect A1”, “decision” in the “fluctuating effect pattern A038” in FIG. 44B). Execution ratio of “effect A2”, see FIG. 67 (d)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the second effect button 19A for which the operation is valid based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "fixed effect A" associated with the "variable effect pattern A038" in FIG. Is designated as "single hit" at a rate of 30%, and "consecutive hits" at a rate of 70%.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 22,} instead of the effect image (b-3-2) of FIG. 54, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A 14 Is effected so as to be displayed on the display. The image of the operation promotion notification, together with the image of the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge, indicates that if the selected operation is "single hit,""singlehit!" It consists of letters.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A1", during operation lifetime X _22, the second performance button 19A, to be the selected specified operation ( "one-base hit" or "pummel") Based on this, as shown in (b-3-3) of FIG. 54, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the image display device 14 via the “operation position 1-1”. To move to the “operating position 1-2”, which is the lower position of the front of the camera, and to execute a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1) on the image display device 14. I do.
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A2", do not set the operation lifetime _{X 22.} That is, in the “determination effect A2”, the image of the operation promotion notification as shown in (b-3-2) of FIG. 54 is not displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is set to “ From the “standby position 1”, via the “operation position 1-1”, the image display device 14 is moved to the “operation position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. Control for executing a corresponding effect (determined effect) such as displaying an effect image (flash a2) is performed.

(Example of “fluctuation effect pattern A042”)
In the variable effect of “variable effect pattern A042”, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the sub CPU 102a sets the special effect “line notice A” in the “symbol change A1-1” in the period (c-1). At this time, any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" shown in the line notice A information table of FIG. 67 (a) is executed.

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _X 31 (2) of FIG. 55, the operation lifetime _{X 31} to set in the "speech announcement A1" - "speech announcement A3" is set to enable operation of the first performance button 18A ( The 100% first effect button is selected), and the second effect button 19A is not enabled (0% second effect button is selected). (Execution ratio of “line announcement A1” to “line announcement A3” in “fluctuation effect pattern A042” in FIG. 44 (b), see FIG. 67 (a)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A whose operation is validated based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "line notice A" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern A042" in FIG. Is designated as "single hit" at a rate of 60%, and "continuous hit" at a rate of 40%.

Sub CPU102a is, if you run a "dialogue notice A1" - "dialogue notice A3", with respect to the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime X _31, in the case of the specified operating the "one-base hit" is "one-base hit" is In the case where "continuous hit" is the designated operation, control is performed to execute the corresponding effects of "serial notice A1" to "serial notice A3" based on the "continuous hit" being performed.

The sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime X ₃₁ controls to perform an effect of displaying an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A on the image display device 14. The image of the operation promotion notification is displayed together with the image of the first effect button 18A and the timer gauge, when the designated operation is "single hit", "single hit!" It consists of letters.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect in “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2). At this time, the sub CPU 102a stores the character notice A information table in FIG. 67 (b). The control for executing any one of the “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” shown is performed.

As shown in Y ₃₁ (2) in FIG. 55, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period Y ₃₁ of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” (100% The first effect button is selected), and the second effect button 19A is not enabled (the 0% second effect button is selected) ("Character notice A1" in "fluctuating effect pattern A042" in FIG. 44B). -Execution rate of "character notice A3", see FIG. 67 (b)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A for which the operation is enabled based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "character announcement A" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern A042" in FIG. Is designated as "single hit" at a rate of 60%, and "continuous hit" at a rate of 40%.

Sub CPU102a is, if you run a "character notice A1" - "Character notice A3", with respect to the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime Y _31, in the case of the specified operating the "one-base hit" is "one-base hit" is In the case where "continuous hit" is the designated operation, the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" is executed based on the fact that "continuous hit" is performed.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A” in “super reach A1-1” in the period (c-3). At this time, the sub CPU 102a displays “development notice A” table shown in FIG. The control for executing any one of the “advance notice A1” to “advance notice A6” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the “development notice A1” as the “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of the “development notice A” in the “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG.発 展 A control for executing any one of the “advance notice A6” is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in "super reach A1-1", in the case of performing any "development notice A1" - "Development notice A3" also sets the operating lifetime _{X 32} to enable the operation of the second performance button 19A and, in the case of performing any "development notice A4" - "development notice A6" also sets the operating lifetime X ₃₂ to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A (see FIG. 67 (c)).

As indicated by X ₃₂ (2) in FIG. 55, the sub CPU 102a activates (selects) the second effect button 19A at a rate of 90% in the operation effective period X ₃₂ and selects the first effect at a rate of 10%. The button 18A is activated. (Execution ratio of “advance notice A1” to “advance notice A6” in “fluctuating effect pattern A042” in FIG. 44 (b), see FIG. 67 (c)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "development notice A" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern A042" in FIG. If the operation of the first effect button 18A is “single-hit” at a rate of 60%, “continuous hit” at a rate of 40%, and the operation of the second effect button 19A is valid, The designation operation for the second effect button 19A is set to "single hit" at a rate of 40% and "continuous hit" at a rate of 60%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A1" - "Development notice A6", to the specified operating a "one-base hit" to the second performance button 19A that operate during the operation lifetime X ₃₂ is valid In the case where “single-hit” is designated as “single-hit” and “continuous-hit” is performed, the control for executing the corresponding effects of the above-mentioned “development notice A1” to “development notice A3” is performed based on the fact that “continuous hit” is performed. Do.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement A4" - "Development notice A6", specifies the operation to "one-base hit" to the first performance button 18A that operate during the operation lifetime X ₃₂ is validated and In this case, based on the fact that “single hit” is performed and “continuous hit” is performed as the designated operation, “continuous hit” is performed, and the corresponding effects of “development notice A4” to “development notice A6” are executed. Perform control.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 32,} instead of the effect image shown in (c-3-2) or (c-3-3) in FIG. 55, the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A The effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including an image of the second effect button 19A or an effect image including an image of operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the second effect button 19A.
Sub CPU102a is valid the operation of the second performance button 19A in the operating lifetime _{X 32} in "Development notice A1" - "Development notice A3", together with the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge specification operation " In the case of "single hit", effect control is performed such that an effect image including a notification promotion image composed of the characters "let's hit!" .
On the other hand, the sub CPU102a is operated in lifetime _X "Development notice A4" and enable operation of the first performance button 18A in ₃₂ - "Development notice A6", the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge, designating operation Is "repeated hit", the effect control is performed so that the effect image including the notification promotion image composed of the characters "Please hit repeatedly!" Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the "determined effect A" in the "special reach A1-1" of the period (c-4). At this time, the "determined effect A" shown in the determined effect A information table of FIG. A1 "and" determined effect A2 ".

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect A1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 33} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 67 (d)).

As shown by X ₃₃ (2) in FIG. 55, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the second production button 19A during the operation valid period X ₃₃ of “fixed production A1” (selects the 100% second production button). ), The operation of the first effect button 18A is not validated (0% first effect button is selected) (“decision effect A1”, “decision” in “fluctuating effect pattern A042” in FIG. 44B). Execution ratio of “effect A2”, see FIG. 67 (d)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the second effect button 19A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "determined effect A" associated with the "variable effect pattern A042" in FIG. In the “determined effect A1”, “single hit” is made effective at a rate of 40%, and “continuous hit” is made effective at a rate of 60%.

Sub CPU102a, the operation in the effective period _{X 33,} instead of the effect image (c-4-2) in FIG. 55, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A The effect displayed on 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification includes the characters of "single hit!" If the designated operation is "single hit" and "let me hit continuously!" If the designated operation is "continuous hit" together with the image of the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge. It consists of

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect A1", for the second performance button 19A during the operation lifetime X _33, when the "one-base hit" is the specified operation is "one-base hit", the "barrage" In the case of the designation operation, the control for executing the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned “determined effect A1” is performed based on the “continuous hit” being performed.

(Example of “fluctuation effect pattern B019”)
In the fluctuation effect of “variation effect pattern B019”, as shown in FIG. 57A, the sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B” as a special effect in “symbol fluctuation B3-1” in the period (d-1). At this time, control is performed to execute one of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” shown in the development notice B information table of FIG. 69 (a).

As shown by X ₄₁ (2) in FIG. 58, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A at a rate of 10% in the operation validity period X ₄₁ set in the “advance notice B1” (10 % First effect button is selected), and the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated at a rate of 90% (90% second effect button is selected) (FIG. 46 (b) "variable effect pattern B019"). The execution rate of “development notice B1”, see FIG. 69 (a)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "development notice B" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern B019" in FIG. 70B. In this case, the designation operation is set to "single hit", and when the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated, the designation operation is set to "continuous hit".

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _41, to the second performance button 19A the operation is valid, based on being a designation operation "pummel" is , The control to execute the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned “development notice B1”.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", during operation lifetime X _41, to the first performance button 18A the operation is valid, that is is a designation operation "one-base hit" Based on the above, the control for executing the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned “development notice B2” is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 41,} instead of the effect image shown in (d-2-1) of FIG. 58, an effect image or the containing image manipulation promotion notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A The effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including an image of operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the second effect button 19A.
Sub CPU102a consists of operation in the effective period _{X 41} to enable the operation of the second performance button 19A "development notice B1", and the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge, the character of "battered case!" The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the notification promotion image.
On the other hand, sub-CPU102a, the operation in the effective period _{X 41} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A "development notice B2", and the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge, and the character of "one-base hit case!" The effect control is performed so as to display the effect image including the notification promotion image composed of.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _41, designating operation for the second performance button 19A (battered) on the basis that is, the special performance symbols reach tilt effect To display an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 58) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) on the image display device 14 so as to execute a corresponding effect (advance notice). Perform control.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", during operation lifetime X _41, based on the designation operation for the first performance button 18A (one-base hit) is a special performance symbols reach tilt effect To display an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 58) having an effect image (effect b2 (orange)) on the image display device 14 so as to execute the corresponding effect (advance notice). Perform control.

(Example of "fluctuation effect pattern B021")
In the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern B021”, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B” as a special effect in “symbol change B3-1” in the period (e-1). At this time, the production control is performed so as to execute one of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” shown in the development notice B information table of FIG. 69 (a).

As shown by X ₅₁ (2) in FIG. 59, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A at a rate of 5% in the operation validity period X ₅₁ set in the “advance notice B1”. The operation of the second effect button 19A is validated at the rate of% (the execution rate of the “development notice B1” in the “fluctuating effect pattern B021” in FIG. 46B, see FIG. 69A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “development notice B” associated with the “fluctuation effect pattern B021” in FIG. 70B. In this case, the designation operation is set to "single hit" at a rate of 80%, and the continuous operation is set at a rate of 20%. When the operation of the second effect button 19A is enabled, the designation operation is set at a rate of 20%. “Single hit” is set, and “consecutive hits” is set at 80%.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _51, to the second performance button 19A which operation is enabled, if the "one-base hit" is a designation operation is "one-base hit Is performed, the control for executing the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "development notice B1" is performed based on the "continuous hit" being performed when "continuous hit" is the designation operation.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", during operation lifetime X _41, to the first performance button 18A which operation is enabled, if the "one-base hit" is a designation operation is When the “single hit” is the designated operation and the “continuous hit” is the designated operation, the control for executing the effect corresponding to the “development notice B2” is performed based on the “continuous hit” being performed.

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 51} is (e-2-1) of FIG. 59, instead of the effect image shown in (e-2-2), operating promoting notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A The effect control is performed such that the effect image including the image of the second effect button 19A or the effect image including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the second effect button 19A is displayed.
Sub CPU102a is operated in the valid period X ₅₁ validates the operation of the second performance button 19A "Development notice B1", the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge if the designated operation is "one-base hit", " The effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including a notification promotion image composed of the characters "hit continuously!"
On the other hand, the sub CPU102a is an effective operation of the first performance button 18A in the operating lifetime _{X 51} in "Development notice B2", the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge specifying operation is "one-base hit" any For example, the effect control is performed such that the effect image including the notification promotion image including the characters “Please hit!

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development announcement B1", during operation lifetime X _51, based on the designation operation of the "one-base hit", and "pummel" is the second performance button 19A, Correspondence effect such as displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image ((e-2-3) in FIG. 59) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) superimposed on the special effect design of the reach-producing effect. ) Is performed.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice B2", during operation lifetime X _51, based on the designation operation of the "one-base hit", and "pummel" is the first performance button 18A, Corresponding production (development notice) such that an effect image ((e-2-3) in FIG. 59) having an effect image (effect b2 (orange)) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect design of the reach-producing effect. ) Is performed.

  In the “special character reach B2-1” of the period (e-3), the sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect B”. At this time, the “determined effect B” shown in the determined effect B information table of FIG. The control for executing any one of the “effect B1” and the “determined effect B2” is performed.

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect B1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 52} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 69 (b)).

As shown by X ₅₂ (2) in FIG. 59, the sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period X ₅₂ set in the “fixed effect B1”, and The operation is not validated (the execution ratio of “determined effect B1” in “fluctuating effect pattern B021” in FIG. 46 (b), see FIG. 69 (b)).

  Then, based on the selection ratio of the operation type in “decided effect B” associated with “variable effect pattern B021” in FIG. 70 (b), the sub CPU 102a The designated operation is “single hit” at a rate of 20%, and “continuous hit” at a rate of 80%.

Sub CPU102a is operated in lifetime _{X 52} is instead effect image (e-3-2) of FIG. 57, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A The effect displayed on 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification includes the characters of "single hit!" If the designated operation is "single hit" and "let me hit continuously!" If the designated operation is "continuous hit" together with the image of the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge. It consists of

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect B1", during operation lifetime X _52, to the second performance button 19A which operation is enabled, if the "one-base hit" is a designation operation is "one-base hit Is performed, the control for executing the corresponding effect of the above-mentioned "fixed effect B1" is performed based on the "continuous hit" being performed when the "continuous hit" is the designation operation.

  In addition, when executing the “determined effect B2”, the sub CPU 102a performs control to execute the corresponding effect of the “determined effect B2” at a predetermined timing.

(Example of "fluctuation effect pattern C019")
In the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern C019”, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice C” as a special effect in “symbol change C3-1” as shown in FIG. At this time, control is performed to execute one of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” shown in the development notice C information table of FIG.

As shown in X ₇₁ (2) of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A at a rate of 8% during the operation valid period X ₇₁ (development notice C2), and Then, the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated (development notice C1) (the execution ratio of the "development notice C1" in the "fluctuation effect pattern C019" in FIG. 48B, see FIG. 71A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “advance notice C” associated with the “fluctuation effect pattern C019” in FIG. 72B. In this case, the designation operation is set to "single hit", and when the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated, the designation operation is set to "continuous hit".

Sub CPU102a, in operation lifetime _{X 71,} instead of the effect image shown in (g-2-1) of FIG. 62, an effect image or the containing image manipulation promotion notification prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A The effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including an image of operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the second effect button 19A.
Sub CPU102a, the operation in the effective period X to validate the operation of the second performance button 19A in ₇₁ "development notice C1", consisting of the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge the character of "battered case!" Notification The effect control is performed so that the effect image including the promotion image is displayed.
On the other hand, sub-CPU102a, the operation in the effective period _{X 71} to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A "development notice C2", from the character and that the image of the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge "one-base hit case!" The effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including the notification promotion image.

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice C1" during operation lifetime X _71, to the second performance button 19A for validating the operation, based on being a designation operation "pummel" is Corresponding production (development notice) such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 62) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect design of the reach-inducing effect. ) Is performed.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice C2", during operation lifetime X _71, to the first performance button 18A for validating the operation, based on being is the designated operation "one-base hit" Corresponding effect such as displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 62) having an effect image (effect c2 (red)) superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach-inducing effect. Control to execute the development notice).

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect C” in the “attack reach C1-1” of the period (g-3). At this time, the “determined effect C” shown in the determined effect C information table of FIG. C1 "and" determined effect C2 ".

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect C1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 72} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 69 (b)).

As shown in X ₇₂ (2) of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the second effect button 19A during the operation effective period X ₇₂ set in the “fixed effect C1”, and activates the first effect button 18A. The operation is not validated (the execution ratio of the "determined effect C1" in the "variable effect pattern C019" of FIG. 48B, see FIG. 71B).

Then, based on the selection ratio of the operation type in “decided effect C” associated with “variable effect pattern C019” in FIG. _72B , the sub CPU 102a activates the second effect button 19A for validating the operation. The designated operation is “continuous hit”.

Sub CPU102a is operated in lifetime _{X 72} is instead effect image (g-2-1) of FIG. 62, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A 14 is displayed. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Please hit repeatedly!" Together with the image of the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect C1" during operation lifetime X _72, to the second performance button 19A the operation is valid, based on the "pummel" is, the above " The control for executing the corresponding effect of the “determined effect C1” is performed.

  In addition, when executing the “determined effect C2”, the sub CPU 102a performs control to execute the corresponding effect of the “determined effect C2” at a predetermined timing.

(Example of “fluctuation effect pattern D019”)
In the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D019”, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” as a special effect in “symbol change D1-1” as shown in FIG. At this time, control is performed to execute one of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” shown in the development notice D information table of FIG. 71 (a).

Sub CPU102a, as shown in _{X 101} (2) of FIG. 65, in the operating lifetime _{X 101,} and enable the operation of the first performance button 18A at the rate of 8% (development notice D2), the proportion of 92% Then, the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated (development notice D1) (the execution ratio of the "development notice D1" in the "fluctuation effect pattern D019" in FIG. 50B, see FIG. 73A).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the “advance notice D” associated with the “fluctuation effect pattern D019” in FIG. 74B. In this case, the designation operation is set to "single hit", and when the operation of the second effect button 19A is validated, the designation operation is set to "continuous hit".

Sub CPU102a is operated in the effective period X ₁₀₁ may effect image including operation promoting notification image prompting the operation of the first performance button 18A or a production which includes an image of operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A The effect control is performed so that the image is displayed.
Sub CPU102a is, in operation effective period _{X 101} when you run the "development notice D1" to enable the operation of the second performance button 19A is, that the image of the second performance button 19A and the timer gauge "battered case!" An effect image including a notification promotion image composed of characters is displayed. On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, in operation valid period _{X 101} when running "development notice D2" to enable the operation of the first performance button 18A, whether the image and a "one-base hit in the first performance button 18A and the timer gauge! The effect control is performed so as to display an effect image including a notification promotion image composed of characters "."

Sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice D1", during operation lifetime X _101, with respect to the second performance button 19A for validating the operation, based on being a designation operation "pummel" is Corresponding production (development notice) such that an effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 65) having an effect image (effect d1 (blue)) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect design of the reach-producing effect. ) Is performed.

The sub CPU102a, when performing the "development notice D2", during operation lifetime X _101, relative to the first performance button 18A for validating the operation, based on being is the designated operation "one-base hit" And displaying an effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 65) having an effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach-inducing effect. Control to execute the development notice).

  Also, during the period (j-4) of “Janken Reach D1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice D” as a special effect. At this time, the sub-CPU 102a displays the character notice D information table in FIG. 73 (b). The control for executing any one of the “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is performed.

As shown in Y ₁₀₁ (2) of FIG. 65, the sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation validity period Y ₁₀₁ of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” (100% The first effect button) and the second effect button 19A are disabled (0% second effect button) (“Character notice D1” to “Character notice” in “Variable effect pattern D019” in FIG. 50B). D3 ", see FIG. 73 (b)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the first effect button 18A for which the operation is validated based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "character notice D" associated with the "fluctuation effect pattern D019" in FIG. 74 (b). Is designated as "single hit".

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "character notice D1" - "character notice D3" for the first performance button 18A during the operation lifetime _{Y 101,} based to be is the designated operation "one-base hit", The control for executing the effects corresponding to the above-described “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes the “determined effect D” in the latter half of the period (j-4). At this time, the “determined effect D1” and the “determined effect D2” shown in the determined effect D information table of FIG. 73 (c). Is performed to execute any of the above.

Sub CPU102a, in case of executing the "decided effect D1" sets the operating lifetime _{X 102} to enable operation of the second performance button 19A (see FIG. 64 (a)).

As shown by X ₁₀₂ (2) in FIG. 65, the sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the second effect button 19A during the operation valid period X ₁₀₂ of the “decided effect D1” (100% second effect button), The operation of the first effect button 18A is not validated (0% first effect button) (FIG. 50 (b), “determined effect D1” and “determined effect D2” in “variable effect pattern D019”). Execution ratio, see FIG. 73 (c)).

  Then, the sub CPU 102a sets the second effect button 19A for which the operation is valid based on the selection ratio of the operation type in the "fixed effect D" associated with the "variable effect pattern D019" in FIG. 74 (b). Is designated as "continuous hit".

Sub CPU102a is operated at effective period _{X 102} may instead effect image (j-4-3) of FIG. 65, the image display device an effect image including the image of the operation promoting notification prompting the operation of the second performance button 19A The effect displayed on 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Please hit repeatedly!" Together with the image of the second effect button 19A and the timer gauge.

Sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect D1", during operation lifetime _{X 102,} the second performance button 19A, to be the selected specified operation ( "one-base hit" or "pummel") Based on this, as shown in (j-4-4) of FIG. 65, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the image display device 14 via the “operating position 1-1”. To move to the “operating position 1-2”, which is the lower position of the front of the camera, and to execute a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1) on the image display device 14. I do.
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

On the other hand, the sub CPU102a, when executing a "decided effect D2", without setting the operation lifetime X _102, at a predetermined timing, "operating position of the first decorative member 17A from the" standby position 1 "as a movable member In addition to moving to the “operation position 1-2” via “1-1”, the image display device 14 executes a corresponding effect (fixed effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a2).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 102a issues an operation prompt to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 18A as the first operation device or the second effect button 19A as the second operation device. In the operation effective state to be performed, based on the operation performed on the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed, and in the operation effective state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. In a certain second operation effective state, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation performed on the first effect button 19A, and the operation is performed on the second effect button 19A. , Does not execute a predetermined effect according to the operation.

  In addition, as described above, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 102a uses a higher rate than the first effect button 18A in the development announcement (third effect) in the variable effect executed based on the determination of the jackpot. The second effect button is selected.

  Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, the sub CPU 102a urges the operation of the first operation type or the operation of the second operation type as the operation on the first effect button 18A, and the second effect As the operation on the button 19A, the third operation type or the fourth operation type operation is promoted, and the ratio of prompting the first operation type operation is different from the ratio of prompting the second operation type operation. The rate at which the type of operation is urged is different from the rate at which the type of operation is urged.

  In the second embodiment, during the operation valid period, the operation of the “first effect button 18A” as the “first operation device” or the “second effect button 19A” as the “second operation device” is enabled. Was described. However, the “first operation means” and the “second operation means” are not limited thereto.

  For example, the “first operation means” may be “second effect button 19A”, and the “second operation means” may be “first effect button 18A”.

  Alternatively, one of the “first operation means” and the “second operation means” may be the above-described operation lever (not shown). In this case, as the operation on the operation lever, the operation of the first operation type and the operation of the second operation type are different operations, and the operation of the third operation type and the operation of the fourth operation type are different operations. For example, the operation of the first operation type is a tilt operation to the near side, the operation of the second operation type is a tilt operation to the back side, the operation of the third operation type is a tilt operation to the left, and the fourth operation type May be an operation of tilting to the right.

  As described above, in the second embodiment of the present invention, the sub CPU 102a provides the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A during the execution of the game effect relating to the game. In the operation effective state to be performed, effect control is performed such that a predetermined effect according to the operation is executed based on an operation performed on the first effect button 18A or the second effect button 19A.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment of the present invention, the sub CPU 102a performs the operation based on the operation performed on the first effect button 18A in the operation enabled state during the standby state in which the game effect is not executed, based on the operation. Even if a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the second effect button 19A is operated, execution of the predetermined effect according to the operation is restricted.
However, as described in the description of the first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, when the first effect button 18A is pressed during the operation effective period of the first effect button 18A in the standby state, the image is displayed. When the menu screen is displayed on the display device 14, the operation of the second effect button 19A or the operation lever in place of this is effective.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and has a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and a second state different from the first state. (Protrusion (or vibration, red, etc.)) that can be changed to an operation means (effect button (or operation lever, etc.)), and that the operation means is operated during an operation valid state in which the operation on the operation means is valid And an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on the effect control means, wherein the effect control means is in an operation effective state for performing an operation promotion notification for prompting a player to perform an operation on the operation means. In the first operation valid state, the operation means is in the first state or the second state, and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed, the operation means is in the first state, Not to be in the second state

  As described above, the gaming machine Y changes the state of the operation unit between the first operation valid state in which the player is prompted to perform an operation prompting operation and the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It offers a variety of different productions.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y is a first operating means (an effect button (or a first effect button or the like)) that can be operated by a player, and a second operating means different from the first operating means. (An operation lever (or a second effect button or the like)) and a state in which the first operation means or the second operation means is operated during an operation valid state in which the operation on the first operation means or the second operation means is effective. And an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect, wherein the effect control means performs an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the first operation means or the second operation means. In the first operation valid state, which is the operation valid state, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed based on the operation performed on the first operation means or the second operation means, and the operation promotion notification is not performed. The second operation valid state that is in the operation valid state A predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed based on the operation performed on the first operation means, and the predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed even if the second operation means is operated. Do not run.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y performs a predetermined effect in the first operation valid state in which the player is prompted to perform an operation to operate the operation means and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion is not performed. It offers a variety of effects using different operation means.

  ◆ As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and has a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and a second state (projection) different from the first state. (Or vibration, red, etc.)) and operation means (operation button (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to an operation means that is operated during an operation valid state in which the operation of the operation means is enabled. And an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect, wherein the effect control means promotes a player to perform an operation on the operation means during execution of the game effect relating to the game. In the first operation valid state that is the operation valid state for performing the notification, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and in the second operation valid state that is the operation valid state in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. And setting the operating means to the first state. Limits to a second state.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation enabled state in which the player is prompted to perform an operation to the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game, and in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. Various effects are provided in which the state of the operation means is different between the second operation valid state in the inside.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y is a first operating means (an effect button (or a first effect button or the like)) that can be operated by a player, and a second operating means different from the first operating means. (An operation lever (or a second effect button or the like)) and a state in which the first operation means or the second operation means is operated during an operation valid state in which the operation on the first operation means or the second operation means is effective. And an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect, wherein the effect control means provides the player with the first operation means or the second operation means during the execution of the game effect relating to the game. In the first operation enabled state, which is an operation enabled state for performing operation promotion notification for prompting an operation to the means, a predetermined operation corresponding to the operation is performed based on an operation performed on the first operation means or the second operation means. Performing the production and performing the game production In the second operation valid state, which is the operation valid state during the standby state, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation performed on the first operation means, and the second operation means is operated. Even if an operation is performed on the same, execution of a predetermined effect according to the operation is restricted.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation enabled state in which the player is prompted to perform an operation to the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game, and in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the operation means used to execute a predetermined effect differs depending on the second operation valid state in the middle.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and determines whether or not to execute the special game by the determining unit. Is executed, a special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game, and a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue, etc.) which can be operated by the player) Based on the operation result (operation button (or operation lever or the like)) that can be changed to a second state (projection (or vibration, red, etc.)) different from the first state, and a judgment result by the judgment means, An effect control means (sub-CPU) for performing a variable effect using an effect symbol for notification, wherein the effect control means performs a predetermined effect based on an operation of an operation means in the variable effect. Directable The predetermined effect includes a first effect performed by operating the operation means in the first state, a second effect performed by operating the operation means in the second state, and the operation in the first state or the second state. A third effect performed by an operation on the means, and in the third effect in the variable effect executed based on the determination by the determination means to execute the special game, the operation means is set to the first state. The second state is set at a higher rate.

  In this way, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by changing the state of the operation means used when executing the third effect at a rate corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. .

  Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and determines whether or not to execute the special game by the determining unit. By being determined to be executed, special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game, first operation means (an effect button (or a first effect button, etc.) operable by a player), and Based on the result of the determination by the second operation means (the operation lever (or the second effect button or the like)) different from the first operation means and the judgment means, a fluctuating effect using an effect symbol for notifying the judgment result is performed. A gaming machine comprising an effect control means (sub CPU), wherein the effect control means can execute a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means in the variable effect. , Prescribed The effect is executed by a first effect executed based on an operation on the first operation unit, a second effect executed based on an operation on the second operation unit, and an operation on the first operation unit or the second operation unit. The third effect is included, and in the third effect in the variable effect performed based on the determination that the special game is to be executed by the determination means, the second operation means is selected at a higher rate than the first operation means. Is done.

  In this way, the gaming machine Y can increase the interest of the player in the game by making the selection ratio of the operation means used in executing the third effect different according to the determination result by the determination means. it can.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y includes a determination unit (main CPU) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and a special game by the determination unit. Is executed, a special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game, a first operation means (an effect button (or a first effect button or the like)) operable by a player, and A variation effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result based on the determination result by the second operation means (operation lever (or second effect button or the like)) different from the first operation means and the determination means; A game control device (sub CPU) for performing the first operation means or the second operation in the operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the variable effect. hand Is performed based on that is operated, and in the operation promoting effect, an operation of the first operation type or an operation of the second operation type different from the first operation type is performed as an operation on the first operation means. The operation of the third operation type or the operation of the fourth operation type different from the operation of the third operation type as the operation to the second operation means, and the rate of the operation of the first operation type The ratio of prompting the operation of the second operation type is different, and the ratio of prompting the operation of the third operation type is different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type.

  As described above, when the gaming machine Y performs a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means in the operation promoting effect, the gaming machine Y operates the first operating means in the operation promoting effect. The operation of the first operation type and the operation of the second operation type are urged at different rates, and the operation of the third operation type and the operation of the fourth operation type are urged at different rates as the operation on the second operation means. Provides various operation promotion effects.

  The operation promotion effect includes an operation promotion effect that prompts only an operation of the first operation type as an operation on the first operation unit and an operation of the fourth operation type only as an operation on the second operation unit.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and determines whether or not to execute the special game by the determining unit. The special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game by being determined to be executed, and the specific game for setting, after the end of the special game, a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state Based on the state setting means (main CPU), operation means (for example, effect button, etc.) which can be operated by the player, and a result of the judgment by the judgment means, a fluctuating effect using an effect symbol for notifying the judgment result is provided. A gaming machine comprising: an effect control means (sub CPU) for performing the operation means, wherein the effect control means is operated in an operation effective state in which an operation on the operation means in the variable effect is enabled. A predetermined effect is performed based on the second stage after the first period in the specific game state at a higher rate than in the first period in the specific game state after the end of the special game. Set the operation enabled state to.

  In this manner, the gaming machine Y can provide an entertaining effect in which the effect using the operating means increases as the specific game state after the end of the special game continues.

  This operation means can be changed between a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and a second state (projection (or vibration, red, etc.) different from the first state), and effect control The means sets an operation valid state in which the operation means is set to the second state in the second period at a higher rate than the first period.

  In this way, the gaming machine Y can provide an entertaining effect in which the effect using the operating means in the second state increases as the specific game state after the end of the special game continues.

  In the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the big hit game, after the big hit game ends, the specific game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time saving game state) A state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) is set, and in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of times of the jackpot determination (the number of executable special symbol displays) reaches 84 times. It has been described as "ST machine". However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the “ST machine”, and the high-probability state continues until the next jackpot is won (or, for example, the 10,000-times high-probability gaming state continues). A gaming machine having a “big hit” and a “normal big hit” in which the gaming state after the big hit game is a low-probability gaming state may be used.

  When the gaming machine Y is such a gaming machine, the period in which the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the jackpot game is changed from 1 to 99 times is referred to as the “first period”, and the jackpot game is performed. A period in which the number of times the subsequent special symbol changes is 100 or more may be set as the above-mentioned “second period”. In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during the fluctuation effect in the “second period” at a higher rate than the “first period”.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can be used for a jing-ball gaming machine and an arranged ball gaming machine.

Y gaming machine 6 first starting opening 6a first starting opening detecting sensor 7 second starting opening 7a second starting opening detecting sensor 8 big winning opening 9 first winning gate 10 second winning gate 14 image display device 17A first decorative member (Movable member)
17B Second decorative member (movable member)
17C Third decorative member (movable member)
18A First production button (first operation means)
19A 2nd production button (2nd operation means)
70 second starting port control device 80 special winning port control device 101 main control board 101a main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 effect control board 102a sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c sub RAM

However, when a predetermined effect is performed based on the operation of the operating means, the state or type of the operating means is determined according to the predetermined effect to be performed.

To achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the invention according to the claims 1, but may be operated by Yu technique's, a first state (e.g., non-projecting state), the different from the first state 2 state (e.g., the projecting state), and changeable operating means (e.g., a first performance button), based on said operation means is operated, presentation control means for performing predetermined Starring unloading the (sub CPU), a gaming machine having a, the effect control means is capable of executing the operation promotion director to promote the operation of the previous Symbol operation means to the player and have you during the execution of the fluctuations director, as the operation promotion director A first operation promotion effect for setting the operation means to the first state (for example, an operation promotion notification of development notices A4 to A6) and a second operation promotion effect for changing the operation means to the second state (for example, development notice) and A1~A3 operation promote the broadcast of), the execution When the operating means is operated in the first operation promoting effect or the second operation promoting effect, an operation effect by a movable member (for example, a second decorative member) can be executed, which is advantageous to a player. During the execution of the fluctuating effect that results in a special game state, the operation effect by the movable member is executed when the second operation promoting effect is executed rather than when the first operation promoting effect is executed. It is easy to be performed.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention includes a first operating means (for example, a first effect button) which is an operating means operable by a player; An operation by a movable member (for example, a second decorative member) based on a second operation unit (for example, a second production button) different from the one operation unit and the first operation unit or the second operation unit being operated. An effect control means (sub CPU) for executing an effect, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing an operation promoting effect for prompting a player to operate the operation means during execution of the variable effect. A first operation effect (for example, advance notices A4 to A6) for executing an operation effect by the movable member based on an operation on the first operation means during the execution of the operation promotion effect; Fruit And a second operation effect (for example, advance notices A1 to A3) for executing an operation effect by the movable member based on an operation on the second operation means during the special operation, which is advantageous to the player. During the execution of the variable effect in the state, the operation effect by the movable member is more easily executed when the second operation effect is executed than when the first operation effect is executed. And

Claims (2)

Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on establishment of the starting condition;
A special game control means for executing the special game by being determined to execute the special game by the judgment means;
A first operating means operable by a player, and a second operating means different from the first operating means;
An effect control means for performing a variable effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result based on the determination result by the determination means,
The effect control means,
Performing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means in an operation promoting effect prompting the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means in the variable effect;
In the operation promotion effect,
As an operation on the first operation means, an operation of a first operation type or an operation of a second operation type different from the first operation type is prompted,
As an operation on the second operation means, an operation of a third operation type or an operation of a fourth operation type different from the operation of the third operation type is prompted,
A rate at which the operation of the first operation type is promoted is different from a rate at which the operation of the second operation type is promoted;
A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of prompting the operation of the third operation type is different from the ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type. In the operation promoting effect, an operation promoting effect of prompting only the operation of the first operation type as an operation on the first operation unit and promoting only the operation of the fourth operation type as an operation on the second operation unit is provided. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: